Инструкция honda hr v скачать

Honda

Honda

Опытный

Регистрация
18 Ноя 2013
Сообщения
84
Симпатии
5


  • #1

Иснтрукция по эксплуатации Honda HR-V I (первого поколения, года выпуска 1998-2005) в формате PDF:

Вложения

  • Руководство по эксплуатации Honda HR-V 1998-2005 RUS.pdf

    83,3 MB

    · Просмотры: 449

Honda HR-V 2023 Owner's Manual PDF

Summary of Content for Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual PDF

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 0

Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 1

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 2

System Updates Terms and Conditions*

General Your vehicle has an application that allows your 9-in. Color Touchscreen to automatically search for Honda software updates that are specific to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen and its connected devices (initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)*, queries may occur more or less frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number, Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP) address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update download and installation, software status), etc.). When the application finds an update from the server, the application initially asks permission to download and install the update. Where available, in your settings menu you may elect to automatically download and install these updates or you may elect to manually update the system.

When your 9-in. Color Touchscreen searches our servers for updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with the opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or alert directly to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen. We will also maintain on our servers a log of the updates or alerts that are installed.

Your Personal Data Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda constitute personal information in your region, please note that this information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data protection law.

* Not available on all models

The terms of our privacy policy are incorporated into these terms by reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the privacy policy. Our privacy policy sets out information about how we and any named third parties will process any personal data we collect from you or that you provide to us, via the application. For further details, see Honda’s connected product privacy policy at: U.S.: www.honda.com Canada: www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata

Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons set out below: to deliver the system updates and related services to you; to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates

products and services; to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal

record keeping. where necessary for Honda’s legitimate interests, as listed

below, and where our interests are not overridden by your data protection rights.

Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance, regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other ethics and compliance reporting requirements.

Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally identify you or any other user of the system updates.

Honda may share this data with Honda’s worldwide support organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third parties engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services in connection with system support.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 3

Software End User License Agreement Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in this Owners Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 4

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels — on the vehicle. Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:

Safety Headings — such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section — such as Safe Driving. Instructions — how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information — please read it carefully.

3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 5

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 6

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The Navigation Manual is available online at honda.ca. If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. Please request a copy from your Honda dealer.

This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

2 Safe Driving P. 33 For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 39 Airbags P. 50

2 Instrument Panel P. 85 Indicators P. 86 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 104

2 Controls P. 133 Clock P. 134 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 136 Moonroof* P. 162 Seats P. 180 Interior Convenience Items P. 189

2 Features P. 211 Audio System P. 212 Audio System Basic Operation P. 219, 244 Customized Features P. 337, 345 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 369, 389

2 Driving P. 409 Before Driving P. 410 Towing a Trailer P. 415 Braking P. 528 Parking Your Vehicle P. 537

2 Maintenance P. 551 Before Performing Maintenance P. 552 Maintenance MinderTM P. 555 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 595

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 603 Tools P. 604 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 605 Overheating P. 620 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 622 Fuses P. 628 If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 636 Refueling P. 637

2 Information P. 639 Specifications P. 640 Identification Numbers P. 642 Emissions Testing P. 645 Warranty Coverages P. 647

Contents

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 7

Child Safety P. 70 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 83 Safety Labels P. 84

Tailgate P. 153 Security System P. 156 Windows P. 159 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 163 Mirrors P. 178 Climate Control System P. 203

Audio Error Messages P. 314 General Information on the Audio System P. 316 Refuel Recommend P. 408

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 416 When Driving P. 418 Honda Sensing P. 449 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 Refueling P. 547 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 550

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 563 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 575 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581 Battery P. 592 Remote Transmitter Care P. 594 Cleaning P. 596 Accessories and Modifications P. 601

Engine Does Not Start P. 612 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 619 Emergency Towing P. 634 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 635

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 643 Reporting Safety Defects P. 644 Authorized Manuals P. 650 Customer Service Information P. 651 Open Source License P. 652

Quick Reference Guide P. 8

Safe Driving P. 33

Instrument Panel P. 85

Controls P. 133

Features P. 211

Driving P. 409

Maintenance P. 551

Handling the Unexpected P. 603

Information P. 639

Index P. 653

8

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 8

Quick Reference

Visual Index

Climate Control System (P203)

Rear Defogger (P176)

Heated Door Mirror Button* (P176)

Audio System (P212)

Navigation System*

() See Navigation System Manual

System Indicators (P86)

Gauges (P104)

Driver Information Interface (P107)

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P163)

Hazard Warning Button

Heated Windshield Button (P176)

Canadian models

(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System OFF) Button (P435)

Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P202)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 9

Headlights/ Turn Signals (P166, 168)

Left Selector Wheel (P108)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Buttons (P471)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button (P491)

Interval Button (P451)

Steering Wheel Adjustments (P177)

Heated Steering Wheel Button* (P201)

Canadian models

Horn (Press an area around .)

Wipers/Washers (P174)

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Buttons (P369, 389)

Audio Remote Controls (P215)

(home) Button (P107)

* Not available on all models

Visual Index

10

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 10

Power Window Switches (P159)

Master Door Lock Switch (P151)

Door Mirror Controls (P179)

Interior Fuse Box (P630)

Hood Release Handle (P564)

Drivers Front Airbag (P53)

Passengers Front Airbag (P53)

Drive Mode Switch (P429)

(Hill Decent Control) Button (P433)

Rearview Mirror (P178)

Automatic Brake Hold Button (P532)

Electric Parking Brake Switch (P528)

Glove Box (P192)

Shift Lever (P427)

USB Port (P213)

Knee Airbags (P58)

Knee Airbags (P58)

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (P67)

Wireless Charger* (P197)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 11

Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P77)

Sun Visors Vanity Mirrors

Map Lights (P190)

Moonroof Switch* (P162)

Seat Belts (P39)

Front Seat (P180)

Front Side Airbags (P61)

USB Ports (P213)

Cargo Area Lights (P191)

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P47)

Accessory Power Socket (P196)

Grab Handle Coat Hook (P194)

Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P79)

LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P75)

Rear Seats (P183)

Rear Side Airbags (P61)

Map Lights (P190)

Side Curtain Airbags (P64)

* Not available on all models

Visual Index

12

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 12

Maintenance Under the Hood (P563)

Windshield Wipers (P174, 577)

Tires (P581, 605)

Rear Wiper (P175, 579)

How to Refuel (P548)

Multi-View Rear Camera (P545)Back-Up Lights and Taillights (P576)Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and Rear Side Marker Lights (P576)

High-Mount Brake Light (P576)

Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P153)Tailgate Outer Handle (P154)Lock Button* (P140)

Side Turn Signal Lights* (P168, 575)

Power Door Mirrors (P179)

Headlights (P166, 575)Front Turn Signal Lights (P168, 575)Front Side Marker Lights (P166, 575)Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P170, 575)

Rear License Plate Light (P576)

Door Lock/Unlock Control (P139)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 13

Eco Assist System (P 429)

Ambient Meter The color of the ambient meter

changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.

DRIVE MODE Switch (P 429) Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 98) Comes on when the ECON mode is selected.

Ambient Meter

* Not available on all models

14

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 14

Safe Driving (P 33)

Airbags (P50)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P70)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P83)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P38)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P39)

Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 15

Instrument Panel (P85)

Indicators (P86)/Gauges (P104)/Driver Information Interface (P107)

Tachometer (P104) Speedometer (P104)

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P105)

Driver Information Interface (P107)

Fuel Gauge (P104)

Outside Temperature (P105) Odometer (P105)

Shift Position Indicator (P91) / Transmission System Indicator (P91)

16

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 16

Clock (P134)

a Press the MENU button.

b Select Clock Settings.

c Select Automatic Time, then select OFF.

d Select Set Time.

e Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour clock.

f Select or .

g Select Set to set the time.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

MENU Button

3 4

To adjust date

To adjust time

a Press the button.

b Select General Settings.

c Select System.

d Select Date & Time.

e Select Set Date & Time.

f Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

g Select Set Date or Set Time.

h Select or .

i Select Save to set the date or time.

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P163)

Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.

3 4

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 17

Turn Signals (P168)

Lights (P166)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing the high beams

Wipers and Washers (P174)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring*

: Lower speed, fewer sweeps : Higher speed, more sweeps

MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

Steering Wheel (P177)

To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside (P150)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.

To adjust

To lock

Lever

* Not available on all models

18

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 18

Tailgate (P153)

With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate.

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the keyless remote.

Models without keyless access system

Models with keyless access system

Power Door Mirrors (P179)

With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P159)

With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.

If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passengers window can be opened and closed with its own switch.

If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passengers window switch is disabled.

Power Window Lock ButtonWindow Switch

Indicator

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 19

Climate Control System (P203)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Fan Control Dial

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Temperature Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

AUTO Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Dashboard vents

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents Floor and windshield defroster vents

MODE Control Dial

Models without SYNC button

20

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 20

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Fan Control Dial Drivers Side Temperature Control Dial

(ON/OFF) Button

AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Dashboard vents

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents Floor and windshield defroster vents

Models with SYNC button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Dial

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

MODE Control Button

(Recirculation) Button

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 21

Features (P211)

Audio Remote Controls (P 215)

SOURCE Button Press to cycle through the audio modes as follows: FM AM USB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto Bluetooth Audio

VOL (+ / VOL (- (Volume) Switch Press to adjust the volume up/down.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons Radio: Press / to change the preset radio station. Press and hold / to change the strong station. iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth Audio, or Smartphone Connection: Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

SOURCE Button

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch

USB flash drive or Bluetooth Audio: Press and hold / to change a folder/group.

VOL (+ / VOL (- (Volume) Switch Press to adjust the volume up/down.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons Radio: Press / to change the preset radio station. Press and hold / to change the strong station. iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth Audio, or Smartphone Connection: Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. USB flash drive: Press and hold / to change a folder.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Left Selector Wheel

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch (Home) Button

Left Selector Wheel When selecting the audio mode Press the (Home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel. Roll up or down: To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

FM

AM

SXM

USB

Bluetooth

Apps (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

Back

22

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 22

Audio system (P 212)

(Seek/Track) Button

RADIO Button

PHONE Button

(Seek/Track) Button

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button

MENU Button

Selector Knob

MEDIA Button

CONNECT Button

(P 219)Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 23

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

Audio/Information Screen

(Seek/Track) Button

(Seek/Track) Button

(P 244) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

24

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 24

Driving (P409)

Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.

Continuously Variable Transmission (P427)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting

Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.

Reverse Used when reversing.

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Drive Normal driving.

Drive (S) Better acceleration. Used to increase engine braking. Used when going up or down hills.

Low Used to further increase engine braking. Used when going up or down hills.

Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.

Press the release button to move the shift lever.

Shift Lever

Release Button

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 25

CMBSTM On and Off (P457)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.

To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the safety support of the driver information interface.

VSA On and Off (P435)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.

VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.

To partially disable or fully restore VSA function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P438)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.

The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.

A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.

U.S. models only

Refueling (P547)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity: 14.0 US gal (53 L)

a Unlock the drivers door.

(P 149)

b Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to make it pop up slightly.

c After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

26

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 26

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

Front Wide View Camera

Sonar Sensors*

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P453)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

Low Speed Braking Control* (P465)

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this system can detect if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/ or assistive driving power suppression.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P471)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P491)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 27

Traffic Jam Assist* (P502)

The traffic jam assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.

Road Departure Mitigation System (P 511)

Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P519)

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

* Not available on all models

28

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 28

Maintenance (P551)

Under the Hood (P563)

Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.

Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.

Lights (P575)

Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P577)

Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield or become noisy.

Tires (P581)

Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 29

Handling the Unexpected (P603)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Flat Tire (P605)

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.

Indicators Come On (P622)

Identify the indicator and consult the owners manual.

Engine Wont Start (P612)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P628)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.

Overheating (P620)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing (P634)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

30

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 30

What to Do If The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P535)

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 31

Why does the beeper sound when I open the drivers door?

The beeper sounds when: The exterior lights are left on. The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

2 Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock) (P142)

Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Pressing the electric parking brake switch does not release the parking brake. Why?

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Models with keyless access system

32

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 32

Depressing the accelerator pedal does not release the parking brake automatically. Why?

Fasten the drivers seat belt. Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other

position.

Im seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P438)

U.S. models only

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 33

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions………….. 34 Important Handling Information……… 36 Your Vehicles Safety Features………… 37 Safety Checklist …………………………… 38

Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts …………………… 39 Fastening a Seat Belt …………………….. 44 Seat Belt Inspection………………………. 49

Airbags Airbag System Components …………… 50 Types of Airbags ………………………….. 53

Front Airbags (SRS) ………………………. 53 Knee Airbags ………………………………. 58 Side Airbags………………………………… 61 Side Curtain Airbags …………………….. 64 Airbag System Indicators……………….. 66 Airbag Care ………………………………… 69

Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers …………… 70 Safety of Infants and Small Children… 72 Safety of Larger Children ………………. 81

Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas ………………….. 83

Safety Labels Label Locations ……………………………. 84

34

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 34

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

The following pages explain your vehicles safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Dont drink and drive Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 35

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

36

uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Handling Information

Safe D rivin

g

1Important Handling Information

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:

2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 425

2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 416 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 36

Important Handling Information Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicles Safety Features Safe D

rivin g

1Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front and rear outer seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 37

Your Vehicles Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

6

7

8

9

10

11

Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

Knee Airbags

Door Locks

Safety Cage

7 9

9

8

10

6

11

10

12

13

9

11

12

8

Side Airbags

12

13 Outer Lap Pretensioners

7

38

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safe D rivin

g

1Safety Checklist

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 38

Safety Checklist For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are

closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.

2 Seats P. 180

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 186

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a childs age, height, and weight.

2 Child Safety P. 70

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 39

Safe D

rivin g

1About Your Seat Belts

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: — frontal impacts — side impacts — rear impacts — rollovers

Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passengers and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 77

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

40

Safe D rivin

g

1About Your Seat Belts

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 40

Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D

rivin g

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON. When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.

The indicator also may not come on, and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 70

The driver information interface uses colors to aid the driver in checking the status of the passengers. For the front seating positions: Green indicates the seat belt is fastened. An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt

is not fastened, and an occupant has not been detected.

An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is unfastened, and an occupant has been detected.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 41

Front seats The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound, and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

Seat Belt Reminder

: Fastened

: Unfastened

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

42

Safe D rivin

g

1Seat Belt Reminder

The system will not detect a passenger in the rear seats who has not fastened the seat belt. The driver should check the status of the rear passengers seat belts at the start of each trip and each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats, using the driver information interface as an aid. An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats unfastens the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.

The driver information interface uses colors to aid the driver in checking the status of the passengers. For the rear seating positions: Green indicates the seat belt is fastened. An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt

has not been fastened recently. An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt

was unfastened recently.

The system does not monitor harnesses that are part of a child seat, the anchors of the LATCH system, or the anchor buckle of the rear center seat belt. While the system can inform you that a seat belt buckle is fastened, it cannot determine whether the rear center seat belt anchor buckle is in use or if a child seat is properly installed or used.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 70

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 42

Rear seats Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use. A driver information interface notifies you if any of the rear seat belts are unfastened after they were previously fastened.

In order to encourage the driver to evaluate rear seat belt usage, the display appears when: Any of the rear passengers seat belts are

unfastened when the power mode is set to ON.

A rear door is opened and then closed. Any of the rear passengers fastens or

unfastens their seat belt. The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and beeper sounds if any rear passengers seat belt is unfastened while driving.

To see the display: 2 Switching the Display P. 107

: Fastened

: Unfastened

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D

rivin g

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on both sides of the vehicle also activates.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 43

The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbags.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Front seats

Outer rear seats

44

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe D rivin

g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

2 About Your Seat Belts P. 39 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 49

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 44

Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

2 Seats P. 180

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

Pull out slowly.

Correct Seated Posture.

Latch Plate

Buckle

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D

rivin g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 45

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

Lap belt as low as possible

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

46

Safe D rivin

g

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 46

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

Push

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D

rivin g

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

3WARNING Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unfastened increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.

Anchor Buckle

Latch Plate

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 47

1. Pull out the seat belts small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

Small Latch Plate

Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

Buckle

Latch Plate

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

48

Safe D rivin

g

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.

When sitting in the front passengers seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 48

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Safe D

rivin g

1Seat Belt Inspection

3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 49

Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract

easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

50

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 50

Airbag System Components

9 13 11 9 10 13

12

7

6

9

6

8

9

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 51

The front, drivers knee, front passengers knee, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo knee airbags. The drivers knee airbag is stored under the steering column; the front passengers knee airbag is stored under the glove box. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

c Four side airbags, one for the driver, one for the front passenger and two for the rear outboard seat occupants. The front airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs and the rear airbags are stored next to the outer rear seating positions. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

dTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

eAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

fAutomatic seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats. In addition, the drivers and front passengers seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

gDrivers seat position sensor. This sensor detects the drivers seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the drivers airbag.

hWeight sensors in the front passengers seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passengers airbag.

i Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

jAn indicator near the front map lights that alerts you that the front passengers front airbag has been turned off.

kAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

mPressure sensors inside each front door that control side airbag deployment.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

52

Safe D rivin

g

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 52

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front, drivers knee and front passengers knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Important Facts About Your Airbags

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Safe D

rivin g

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 53

Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the drivers and front passengers seats. Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box. Side airbags: Airbags in the drivers and front passengers outer seat-backs and

next to the outer rear seating positions. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupants primary restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Housing Locations

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

54

Safe D rivin

g

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the drivers and front passengers airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 54

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they wont interfere with the drivers visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Operation

How the Front Airbags Work

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 55

When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

56

Safe D rivin

g

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the drivers seat position sensor or the passengers seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the drivers seating position or passengers occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 66

For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.

The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.

The occupants feet are placed on the floor in front of them.

There are no objects hanging from the front passengers seat.

Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.

The steering wheel and passengers side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.

No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passengers seat.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 56

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

The drivers advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the drivers airbag.

The front passengers advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passengers airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passengers airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67

Advanced Airbags

Drivers Seat Position Sensor

Passengers Seat Weight Sensors

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

1Advanced Airbags

There are no objects placed under or beside the front passengers seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The head restraint is not contacting the roof. 2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67

The floor mat behind the front passengers seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

2 Floor Mats P. 597

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 57

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passengers seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passengers seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passengers airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passengers seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

58

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Knee Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as they can interfere with the proper operation of the airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.

The driver and front passenger should not store any items under the seat or behind their feet. The items can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and may result in inadequate protection.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 58

Knee Airbags The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by the vehicles other safety features.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupants primary restraint system.

The knee airbag for the driver and the one for the front passenger are housed under the steering column and the glove box respectively.

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Housing Locations

Housing Location

Housing Location

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 59

The drivers and front passengers knee airbag deploy at the same time as the drivers and front passengers airbag respectively.

Operation

When inflated

Knee Airbag

When inflated

Knee Airbag

60

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 60

When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D

rivin g

1Side Airbags

Make sure you, your front seat passenger, and rear outboard seat occupants always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Side airbag deployment is controlled by a pressure sensor inside each front door. Damage or changes to the inside or outside of the doors may negatively affect side airbag deployment. Contact an authorized dealer before changing or repairing a front door.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 61

Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the drivers and passengers seat- backs and next to the outer rear seating positions.

Each are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing Locations

Housing Location

Housing Location

62

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 62

When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

Operation

When inflated

Side Airbag

When inflated

Side Airbag

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 63

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicles framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicles crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

64

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Side Curtain Airbags

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 64

Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Safe D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 65

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

66

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe D rivin

g

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 66

Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you dont, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D

rivin g

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.

The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.

The occupants feet are placed on the floor in front of them.

There are no objects hanging from the front passengers seat.

Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.

No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passengers seat. There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passengers seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 67

When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passengers airbag has been turned off. This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 70

If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passengers airbag will not deploy. The passengers knee airbag will not deploy, either.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

U.S. Canada

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

68

Safe D rivin

g

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate the passengers airbag. If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points on the previous page are met. If the above conditions are met and the indicator is still on, then with the transmission in park, turn to VEHICLE off and back on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if: All of the above conditions are met, and the

indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.

The seat is empty and the indicator is off.

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 68

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D

rivin g

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbags, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 69

Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the drivers seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passengers seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800- 999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888- 9-HONDA-9.

70

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 70

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the drivers ability to safely control the vehicle.

Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

2 Safety Labels P. 84

3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 71

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.

Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

72

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe D rivin

g

1Protecting Infants

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position. The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 72

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturers weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

2 Airbags P. 50

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturers instructions.

3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 73

If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Protecting Smaller Children

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

74

Safe D rivin

g

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 74

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturers use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your childs safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Selecting a Child Seat

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your childs safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

3WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 75

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

The location of each lower anchor is shown in the illustration.

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Lower Anchors

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

76

Safe D rivin

g

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH- compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 16.1 inches (410 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturers instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

3WARNING Using the outer rear seats inner anchors to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child seat, causing injury or death.

Only use the outer rear seats inner anchors to install a child seat in the center seating position if the manufacturers instructions expressly permit.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 76

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

4. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.

5. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Flexible Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight Top Tether Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 77

A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat manufacturers instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 4.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

78

Safe D rivin

g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 78

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Adding Security with a Tether

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 79

A tether anchor point is provided behind the rear outer seating positions and in the ceiling for the rear center. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Using an outer anchor 1. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

2. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchor Points

Outer position

Tether Anchor Point

Center position

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Straight Top Tether Type

80

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 80

Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position. 2. Open the anchor cover. 3. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

Anchor

Anchor Cover

Straight Top Tether Type

Anchor

Anchor Cover

Other Top Tether Type

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D

rivin g

1Safety of Larger Children

3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 81

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist Do the childs knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the

childs neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the childs thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

82

Safe D rivin

g

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 82

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the childs safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturers recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

Booster Seats

Protecting Larger Children — Final Checks

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 83

Safe D

rivin g

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

84

Safe D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 84

Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Dashboard

Radiator Cap

Sun Visor

U.S. models only

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Air Conditioner System

U.S. models Canadian models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 85

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators …………………………………….. 86 Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges…………………………………….. 104 Driver Information Interface …………. 107

86

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 86

Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may display on the Driver Information Interface at the same time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 87

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

U.S.

Canada

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner’s manual.

P. 88*1

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Charging System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber)

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF Indicator

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Auto High-Beam Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator*

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

System Message Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 90

P. 90

P. 90

P. 91

P. 91

*1

*1

P. 95

*1

Shift Position Indicator P. 91

Transmission System Indicator

P. 91

P. 92

P. 92

P. 93

P. 93

P. 96

P. 94

*1

*1

P. 94

*1 P. 93

P. 99

*1

P. 96

P. 96

P. 96

Immobilizer System Indicator Security System Alarm Indicator

P. 97

P. 98

P. 100

P. 103

*1

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/ Green)

P. 99

*1

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/Green)

P. 100

*1 Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

P. 101

*1

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/Green) P. 99

*1

Low Temperature Indicator

P. 92

P. 97 *1

*1

ECON Mode Indicator P. 98

NORMAL Mode Indicator P. 98

SNOW Mode Indicator P. 98

Hill Descent Control System Indicator (White/Green) P. 98*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

87Continued* Not available on all models

88

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 88

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake applied.

Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply the electric parking brake while the power mode is in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.

Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric parking brake is applied, then goes off.

Comes on when the brake fluid level is low. Comes on while driving — Make sure the parking brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check the brake fluid level.

2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 624

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 89

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.

Comes on along with the ABS indicator — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks P. 624

Comes on along with the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) — Immediately stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The brake pedal becomes harder to operate. Depress the pedal further than you normally do.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 626

Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time — There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. The parking brake may not be set. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 626

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

90

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 90

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.

Comes on while driving — Avoid high speeds and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a dealer immediately.

Comes on if there is a problem with the electric parking brake system and/or the automatic brake hold system.

Stays on constantly — Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Comes on if the brake system is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold system is on. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 532

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold is activated.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 532

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

U.S.

Canada

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 91

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

After you have set the power mode to ON, the vehicle performs system checks. However, if the readiness codes have not been set by that time, this indicator will blink five times and then go off.

Readiness codes are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 645

Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.

Blinks when a misfire in the engines cylinders is detected.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 623

Charging System Indicator

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer immediately.

2 Checking the Battery P. 592 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

P. 623

Shift Position Indicator

Indicates the current shift position.

2 Shifting P. 427

Transmission System Indicator

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

92

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 92

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON, then the indicator comes on.

If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.

Comes on for a while when the rear seat belt is unfastened while the power mode in ON.

Blinks while driving if you and/or any passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.

Stays on after you and/or the passengers has fastened the seat belt(s) — A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 41

Low Fuel Indicator (Amber)

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.1 U.S. gal./8.0 Liter left).

Comes on — Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Low Temperature Indicator

Comes on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached normal operating temperature, there may be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 93

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem with the ABS.

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 535

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: — Supplemental Restraint System — Side airbag system — Side curtain airbag system — Seat belt tensioner

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Do not drive displays on the driver information interface — Immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 625

94

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 94

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator

Blinks when VSA is active.

Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA system, brake assist system, hill start assist, or agile handling assist.

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 434

2 Hill start assist system P. 423 2 Brake Assist System P. 536 2 Agile Handling Assist P. 436

Comes on if the VSA system is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF Indicator

Comes on when you partially disable VSA. 2 VSA On and Off P. 435

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 95

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

May come on briefly if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.

Comes on and stays on when: — One or more tires pressures are

determined to be significantly low. — The system has not been calibrated.

Comes on while driving — Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures — The system needs to be calibrated.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 439

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

Blinks and remains on — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then reconnected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

U.S. models

96

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 96

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.

Blinks along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.

Does not blink or blinks rapidly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on when the parking, tail, and other external lights are on.

2 Lights P. 166

High Beam Indicator

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

Auto High-Beam Indicator

Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met. 2 Auto High-Beam P. 171

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 97

*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Immobilizer System Indicator

Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.

Blinks — You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then select the ON mode again.

Repeatedly blinks — The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Security System Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.

2 Security System Alarm P. 156

U.S.

Canada Indicator

Indicator

U.S.

Canada Indicator

Indicator

98

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 98

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

ECON Mode Indicator

Comes on when you set the drive mode to ECON.

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429

NORMAL Mode Indicator

Comes on when you set the drive mode to NORMAL.

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429

SNOW Mode Indicator

Comes on when you set the drive mode to SNOW.

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429

Hill Descent Control System Indicator (White/ Green)

Lights up in white when the hill descent control system is on and ready to use.

Lights up in green when the hill descent control system is in operation.

2 Hill Descent Control System P. 432

System Message Indicator

Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the driver information interface appears at the same time.

While the indicator is on, press the (home) button, and select Warnings to see the message again.

2 Accessing contents in the display P. 107 Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter

when a system message appears on the driver information interface. Respond to the message accordingly.

The driver information interface will not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the (home) button is pressed.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 99

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Comes on while driving — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413 Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/Green)

Lights up in white when you press the button.

Lights up in green when you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 471

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/ Green)

Lights up in white when you change to cruise mode.

Lights up in green when you have set a speed for cruise control.

2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control P. 488

100

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 100

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413 Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/Green)

Lights up in white when you press the LKAS button.

Lights up in green when the LKAS is in operation.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 101

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, or blind spot information system*.

Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if there is a problem with the parking sensor.

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. if the indicator stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413 Stays on constantly — Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation system, Low Speed Braking Control* and CMBSTM are deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected and then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with Parking Sensor System

101Continued* Not available on all models

102

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 102

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on when Road Departure Mitigation system and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.

Stays on — The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

Stays on — The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message are still displayed even after you have cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525 It may come on when the ambient conditions are

dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night, dawn, or dusk.

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 103

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sonar sensor.

Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of sonar sensor. 2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor.

Comes on when the temperature of the blind spot information system sensor is high.

Comes on while driving — Something may be interfering with the blind spot information system sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor and remove any obstacles.

The system will return to normal when the temperature cools down.

2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 445

Safety Support Indicator (Green/ Gray)

Lights up in green when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, Parking Sensor System*, and blind spot information system* are on.

Lights up in green and gray when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, Parking Sensor System*, or blind spot information system*, or any two, three or four of these systems are off.

Lights up in gray when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, Parking Sensor System*, and blind spot information system* are off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) P. 453 2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 445 2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465 2 Parking Sensor System* P. 538

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models with blind spot information system

103* Not available on all models

104

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 104

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

1Speedometer

You can change the Speed/Distance Units. 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122 2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

1Tachometer

The tachometer can be turned on and off using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

E

Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Speedometer

Tachometer

Fuel Gauge

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

You can adjust the temperature reading. 2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 105

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading by up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Shows certain detected traffic signs while driving. The indicator blinks when the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected by the Traffic Sign Recognition System is exceeded.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519

Odometer

Outside Temperature

Traffic Sign Recognition System

Continued 105* Not available on all models

106

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 106

Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist*.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 471 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491 2 Traffic Jam Assist* P. 502

Shows the clock. You can adjust the time manually and change the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Clock P. 134

Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist*

Clock

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Switching the Display

You can add or delete the meter contents. 2 Customize Display P. 121

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 107

Driver Information Interface The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information. When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer and have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the Engine oil pressure low or Engine temperature too hot message is displayed.

2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 622 2 Overheating P. 620

Accessing contents in the display Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.

Switching the Display

108

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 108

Customize display P. 121

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

Roll the left selector wheel.

No content P. 122

Speed & time P. 111

Warnings P. 122

Range & fuel P. 109

Settings*

P. 123

Driver attention P. 114

Seat belts P. 118

Safety Support P. 118

Maintenance P. 118

Phone*

P. 112

Audio*

P. 112

Navigation*

P. 113

AWD torque distribution*

P. 117

Brightness P. 120

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 109

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

Range/Fuel/Trip Meter

Average Fuel Economy

Range

Trip Meter B

Instant Fuel Economy

Trip Meter A

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

110

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

1Range

The driving range displayed is only an estimate and may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can travel.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 110

Trip meter Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset. u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Instant Fuel Economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicles current fuel economy.

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 111

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

Speed/Time/Trip Meter

Trip Meter B

Average Speed

Trip Meter A

Elapsed Time

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

112

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Elapsed time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

1Average speed

You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 112

Trip meter 2 Trip meter P. 110

Elapsed time Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average speed Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Shows the current audio information. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 244

Shows the current phone information. 2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 389

Audio*

Phone*

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Navigation*

You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.

2 Customized Features P. 345

Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all apps.

When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are displayed, you can control some navigation system functions on the driver information interface by scrolling the left selector wheel.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Models with navigation system

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 113

Compass Shows the compass screen.

Turn-by-Turn Directions When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system*, Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Android AutoTM P. 308 2 Apple CarPlay P. 301

Navigation*

Continued 113* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

114

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive. Regardless of the systems feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 114

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the drivers attention on the driver information interface.

When you select Driver attention on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the drivers attention.

2 Accessing contents in the display P. 107

Driver Attention Monitor

Driver Information Interface

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

Level

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 115

If two bars light up, the Driver attention level low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver attention level low. Time for a break. message will appear, a beep will sound, and the steering wheel will vibrate. If this message appears, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed. The message will disappear when the left selector wheel is pressed or when the system has determined that the driver is driving normally. If the driver does not take a break and the monitor continues to detect that the driver is very tired, the message will appear again after approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a beep and steering wheel vibrations. The message does not appear when the traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

116

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 116

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when: The engine is turned off. The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function: The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h). The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:

The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491

The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy. It is windy. The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as

changing lanes or accelerating.

Customizing You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible alert*1/Tactile And Audible Alert*2, Tactile alert*1/Tactile Alert*2, or OFF.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen *2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 117

The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.

2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM* P. 437

AWD Torque Distribution Monitor*

117Continued* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

118

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Safety Support

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511 2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 445 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) P. 453 2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 465 2 Parking Sensor System* P. 538

You can also confirm the status of each function by the color of the safety support indicator.

2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 101 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 103

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 118

Appears, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched. 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 41

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 555

Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, Parking Sensor System*, and blind spot information system*, such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.

The following colors indicate the status of any of the above mentioned systems: Green: The system is on. Gray: The system is off. Amber: There is a problem with the system.

Seat Belts

Maintenance

Safety Support

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 119

Area Info for CMBSTM

Area Info for Road Departure Mitigation System

Area Info for Blind Spot Information System

Area Info for Parking Sensor System

Road Departure Mitigation System Icon and Status Info

Area Info for Low Speed Braking Control

Blind Spot Information System Icon and Status Info

Parking Sensor System Icon and Status Info

CMBSTM Icon and Status Info

Low Speed Braking Control Icon and Status Info

Models with Blind Spot Information System

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models with Parking Sensor System

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

120

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Brightness

The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted depending on the ambient brightness. The brightness dims when the ambient light is

dark. The brightness brightens when the ambient light is

bright.

You can change the setting even when the ambient lighting is bright, but the brightness of the gauge wont change.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 120

Display the adjustment for instrument panel brightness.

When the power mode is in ON, you can use the left selector wheel to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Roll the left selector wheel up. Dim: Roll the left selector wheel down.

Press the left selector wheel to exit.

Brightness

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Customize Display

Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the home screen.

When you customize settings, shift to (P.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 121

Arrange content You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.

1. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display, then press the left selector wheel.

2. Roll the left selector wheel.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll between icons, then press the left selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

Customize Display

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

122

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1No Content

The tachometer can be turned on and off using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

Even if you have turned off the tachometer on the driver information interface or audio/information screen, if No content is selected on the driver information interface, it will change to a tachometer- only display.

2 Switching the Display P. 107

1Warnings

If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left selector wheel to see other warnings.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 122

2 Tachometer P. 104

Speed/Distance Units Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and audio/ information screen and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and mph or km and km/h.

Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select No content on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.

You can check if there are any active warning messages.

No Content

Warnings

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Settings*

To customize other features, roll the left selector wheel.

2 List of customizable options P. 124 2 Example of customization settings P. 130

When you customize settings, shift to (P.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 123

Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

How to customize

Press the (home) button, then select the Settings screen by rolling the left selector wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift position is in (P . Then, press the left selector wheel.

Settings*

Driver Information Interface

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

Continued 123* Not available on all models

124

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 124

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS calibration* Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate

Driver assist system setup

Forward collision warning distance

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC forward vehicle detect beep

Causes the system to beep when a vehicle is detected or when the vehicle is out of ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ON/OFF*1

Road departure mitigation setting

Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation system.

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning only

Lane keeping assist suspend beep

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF*1

Blind spot information* Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and visual alert*1/Visual alert

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 125

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Driver assist system setup

Traffic sign recognition system display setting

Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off. ON*1/OFF

Traffic sign recognition system exceeding speed warning

Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed warning on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Speed limit warning threshold setting

Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition system over speed warning is activated.

Speed limit*1/ Speed limit+3mph/ Speed limit+5mph/ Speed limit+10mph (When mph is selected) Speed limit*1/ Speed limit+5km/h/ Speed limit+10km/h/ Speed limit+15km/h (When km/h is selected)

Driver attention monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor. Tactile and audible alert*1/ Tactile alert/OFF

126

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 126

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Meter setup

Language selection Changes the displayed language. English*1/Franais/ Espaol

Adjust outside temp. display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

Trip A reset timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.

When fully refueled/ IGN OFF/Manually reset*1

Trip B reset timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.

When fully refueled/ IGN OFF/Manually reset*1

Adjust alarm volume Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on. High/Mid*1/Low

Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Rear seat reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Speed/distance units Selects the trip meter units.

km/hkm/mphmiles*1 (U.S.) km/hkm*1/mphmiles (Canada)

Tachometer Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the instrument panel.

ON*1/OFF

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 127

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Keyless access setup*

Door unlock mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver door only*1/All doors

Keyless access light flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Keyless access beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Remote start system ON/OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Lighting setup

Auto high-beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. ON*1/OFF

Interior light dimming time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight auto off timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Auto light sensitivity* Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto headlight ON with wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

ON*1/OFF

127Continued* Not available on all models

128

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 128

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door setup

Auto door lock Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate automatically lock.

With vehicle speed*1/ Shift from P/OFF

Auto door unlock Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate automatically unlock.

All doors when drivers door opens*1/All doors when shifted to Park/ All doors when ignition switched OFF/OFF

Walk away auto lock* Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle.

ON/OFF*1

Keyless lock answer back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

ON*1/OFF

Keyless remote power window control

Turns remote window control using the keyless remote on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Lockout prevention* Changes the settings for the lockout protection function.

ON*1/OFF

Lock presetting Changes the settings for the Lock Presetting function. ON*1/OFF

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 129

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Maintenance reset

Resets the Maintenance Minder display when you have performed the maintenance service.

(Selects Reset Items)

Default all Cancels customized changes you have made or restores them to their default setting.

Cancel/Set

130

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 130

Example of customization settings The steps for changing the Trip A reset timing setting to When fully refueled are shown below. The default setting for Trip A reset timing is Manually reset.

1. Press the (home) button and roll the left selector wheel to select Settings, then press the left selector wheel.

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface In

stru m

en t Pan

el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 131

2. Roll the left selector wheel until Meter setup appears on the display.

3. Press the left selector wheel. u Language selection appears first in the

display.

4. Roll the left selector wheel until Trip A reset timing appears on the display, then press the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you can select When fully refueled, IGN OFF, Manually reset, or Back.

5. Roll the left selector wheel and select When fully refueled, then press the left selector wheel. u The Selected appears, then the display

returns to the customization menu screen.

132

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

In stru

m en

t Pan el

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 132

6. Press the left selector wheel after Back appears on the display.

7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

* Not available on all m

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 133

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock ………………………………………….. 134 Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key ………………………………………….. 136 Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength …138 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside …………………………………… 139

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ……………………………………… 149

Childproof Door Locks ………………… 151 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ………. 152

Tailgate………………………………………. 153 Security System

Immobilizer System …………………….. 156 Security System Alarm…………………. 156

Windows ……………………………………. 159

Moonroof* …………………………………. 162 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button…………. 163 Lights……………………………………….. 166 Auto High-Beam………………………… 171 Wipers and Washers …………………… 174 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ……………………………………. 176

Heated Windshield Button …………… 176 Adjusting the Steering Wheel……….. 177

Canadian models

Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ………………. 178 Power Door Mirrors ……………………. 179

Seats Front Seats ……………………………….. 180 Rear Seats…………………………………. 183 Maintain a Proper Sitting Position …. 185 Head Restraints………………………….. 186 Armrest ……………………………………. 188

Interior Convenience Items………….. 189 Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control …. 203 Automatic Climate Control Sensors… 209

134

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 134

1Adjusting the Clock

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

You can also select and enter with the selector knob instead of the touch panel.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Adjusting the Clock You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON.

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Clock Settings. 3. Select Automatic Time, then select OFF. 4. Select Set Time. 5. Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour

clock. 6. Select or . 7. Select Set to set the time.

Adjusting the Time

MENU Button

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

3 4

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Clock

You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the header area of the audio/ information screen, Clock displayed on the home screen, or All Apps. 1. Touch the clock on the screen.

The clock screen of the face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Date & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by

selecting or . 8. Select Save to set the time.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 How to Customize the General Settings P. 345

You can customize the date display to MM/DD/ YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.

2 How to Customize the General Settings P. 345

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

3 4

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 135

1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Date & Time. 5. Select Set Date & Time. 6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select OFF.

To adjust date: 7. Select Set Date. 8. Select or . 9. Select Save to set the date.

To adjust time: 7. Select Set Time. 8. Select or . 9. Select Save to set the time.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

3 4

3 4

136

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 136

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

1Key

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps protect against vehicle theft.

2 Immobilizer System P. 156

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely start the engine using the remote engine start.

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 420

Models with button

Key This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock all the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door.

Models without button

Models with button

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey C

o n

tro ls

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 137

The built-in key can be used to unlock the doors when the keyless remote battery becomes weak and the power door unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, push the release button and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless remote until it clicks.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

Built-in Key

Release Button

Built-in Key

Key Number Tag

138

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength

C o

n tro

ls

1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 138

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to start the engine, lock and unlock* all the doors and the fuel fill door, and open the tailgate.

In the following cases, starting the engine, locking/unlocking* the doors/fuel fill door, or opening the tailgate may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors and tailgate. No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds. Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off immediately.

2 Interior Lights P. 189

1Using the Keyless Access System*

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.

Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 139

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

When you carry the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door, and open the tailgate. You can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door, and tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.

Using the Keyless Access System*

139Continued* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

140

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Keyless Access System*

If you grip a front door handle or touch the front door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by locking/unlocking the doors.

After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.

The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.

Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors and tailgate with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.

The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door, door glass and tailgate.

The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

The keyless access system will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 140

Locking the doors and tailgate Touch the door lock sensor on the front door or press the lock button on the tailgate. u All the doors, fuel fill door, and tailgate

lock and the security system sets. u Some exterior lights flash once and the

beeper sounds once.

Door Lock Sensor

Lock Button

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 141

Unlocking the doors and tailgate Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door and fuel fill door

unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passengers door handle: u All the doors and the tailgate unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. Press the tailgate outer handle: u The tailgate unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. 2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 154

Outer Handle

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

142

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the driver information interface or audio/ information screen. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the driver information interface or audio/information screen, only the remote transmitter that was used to unlock the drivers door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash until the doors and tailgate are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door or tailgate after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be canceled.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 142

Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)

When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors and tailgate closed while carrying the keyless remote, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the keyless remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle. Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and close door(s) and tailgate. 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of

the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock

function will be activated. 2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5

feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock.

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

1

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)

Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate: The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. uThe beeper will not sound. The keyless remote is taken out of its operational

range before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound.

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. A door, tailgate or the hood is not closed. The power mode is set to any mode other than

OFF. The keyless remote is not located within a radius of

about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors and tailgate.

Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through

a window. You are located too close to the vehicle. The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 143

To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the drivers door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate

the lock as follows: LockUnlockLockUnlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is

deactivated.

To restore the function: Set the power mode to ON. Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock

function With the keyless remote on you, move out

of the auto lock function operation range. Open any door.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

144

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking the doors and tailgate (lock presetting)

Lock presetting will be reset if a door or the tailgate is opened before the vehicle has locked completely.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

You can turn this function on and off.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 144

The vehicle will automatically lock after you lock the doors in advance then close the doors and tailgate.

Activate lock presetting after closing the drivers door.

1. Touch the door lock sensor on the drivers door* or press the lock button on the remote transmitter. u Alert sounds and lock presetting is

activated. 2. Close all doors and the tailgate. u Some exterior lights flash and a beeper

sounds when vehicle locks.

Make sure the doors and tailgate are locked before moving away from the vehicle.

Locking the doors and tailgate (lock presetting)

Door Lock Sensor

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 594

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 145

Locking the doors and tailgate Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors,

fuel fill door, and tailgate lock, and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u A beeper sounds and verifies the security

system is set.

Unlocking the doors and tailgate Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the

drivers door and fuel fill door unlock. Twice: u The remaining doors and the tailgate

unlock.

Using the Remote Transmitter

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

146

C o

n tro

ls

1Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When unlocking, the drivers door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.

If the lock button of the keyless remote does not work, refer to the following.

2 Locking a Door Without Using a Key P. 147

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 146

If the unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the built-in key instead. The keyhole is on the back of the door handle.

Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder from below the handle and then turn it.

Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the drivers door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 147

If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.

Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Locking a Door Without Using a Key

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

148

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

You can change the lockout protection operation setting.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with keyless access system

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 148

Lockout protection function If the vehicle cannot detect the keyless remote, lockout protection activates. u A beeper sounds, some exterior lights

flash, the doors unlock, and a message appears on the driver information interface.

u This allows you to open a door in case the keyless remote is still inside the vehicle.

If you do not open a door, all doors relock after 15 seconds.

To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep the keyless remote away from cell phones and other devices that may cause signal interference.

Lockout prevention system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

Models with keyless access system

Models without keyless access system

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, all of the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, only the drivers door will unlock.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 149

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.

Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.

Using the Lock Tab

To unlock

Lock TabTo lock

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

150

C o

n tro

ls

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

2 Childproof Door Locks P. 151

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 150

Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one

motion.

Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors unlocking use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only.

If you do not want all the doors to unlock all the time, customize the Auto door unlock*1/Auto Door Unlock*2 setting to OFF using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen *2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Inner Handle

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master door lock switch, all the other doors, fuel fill door, and tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 151

Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all the doors, fuel fill door, and tailgate.

Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

To lock

To unlock

Master Door Lock Switch

Setting the Childproof Door Locks

Lock

Unlock

152

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

C o

n tro

ls

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 152

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Drive lock mode All doors lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Drivers door open mode All doors and the tailgate unlock when the drivers door is opened.

Auto Door Locking

Auto Door Unlocking

* Not available on all models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 153

C

o n

tro ls

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

3WARNING Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured. Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. Open the tailgate all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close. Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 83

154

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

C o

n tro

ls

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Make sure cargo or other items do not touch the tailgate support struts.

Tailgate Support Struts

1Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.

Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

Do not leave the keyless remote inside the cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.

Models with keyless access system

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 154

Opening/Closing the Tailgate When all the doors are unlocked or press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate.

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.

If you close the tailgate when the drivers door is locked, the tailgate locks automatically. u Some exterior lights flash.

Outer Handle

Inner Handle

Models with keyless access system

All models

uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 155

Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.

Using the Remote Transmitter

Tailgate Unlock Button

Tailgate Unlock Button

156

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 156

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the battery has been disconnected.

Canadian models

1Security System Alarm

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

Immobilizer System This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine.

Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/

STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicles immobilizer system near the ENGINE

START/STOP button. Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and

audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.

Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*. However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the transmission is taken out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is in ON.

When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.

* Not available on all models

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C

o n

tro ls

1Security System Alarm

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the hood with the hood release handle. Taking the transmission out of (P.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may activate once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system*.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 157

To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, the remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or set the power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF. The hood is closed. All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the remote transmitter or

keyless access system*.

When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

Continued 157* Not available on all models

158

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 158

The panic button on the remote transmitter

If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.

Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter. Set the power mode to ON.

Panic Mode

Panic Button

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 159

C

o n

tro ls

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.

The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

3WARNING Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors. The drivers side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows.

The power window lock button on the drivers side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the drivers seat.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the drivers window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

Power Window Lock Button

Drivers Window Switch

Indicator

Passengers Window Switch*

159Continued* Not available on all models

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

160

C o

n tro

ls

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 160

To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Close

Open

* Not available on all models

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C

o n

tro ls

1Opening the Windows with the Remote

If you open the windows with the remote transmitter, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

You can turn off or on to open the windows with the keyless remote setting using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with moonroof

All models

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

1Opening the Windows with the Key

If you open the windows with the key, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

Models with moonroof

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 161

To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

Pull and hold the outer handle. Insert the key into the key cylinder completely from below the handle.

To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.

Opening the Windows with the Remote

Unlock Button

Opening the Windows with the Key

Open

161* Not available on all models

162

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 162

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

2 Opening the Windows with the Remote P. 161

2 Opening the Windows with the Key P. 161

3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Opening/Closing the Moonroof You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.

Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

Using the Moonroof Switch

Open

Close Tilt

* Not available on all models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 163

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

C

o n

tro ls

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

If the keyless remote is set in a storage box or another place where its signal can be interrupted, the power mode may not change.

When the power mode is set to ON, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY if the ENGINE START/ STOP button is pressed while the transmission is in a position other than (P.

ENGINE START/STOP Button

If you carry the keyless remote and press ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the brake pedal, the power mode will change in this order: VEHICLE OFFACCESSORYON VEHICLE OFF.

VEHICLE OFF: Vehicle power is turned OFF. ACCESSORY: The audio system and some accessories can be used. ON: All accessories can be used.

Changing the Power Mode

164

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 164

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beep sound.

Automatic Power Off

Power Mode Reminder

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button C

o n

tro ls

1Keyless Remote Reminder

When the keyless remote is within the systems operational range, and all the doors are closed, the warning function cancels.

If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been turned on, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the keyless remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the keyless remote is within the systems operational range.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 165

When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.

When the power mode is in ACCESSORY

The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.

When the power mode is in ON An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.

Keyless Remote Reminder

166

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

C o

n tro

ls

1Lights

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

2 Lights On Indicator P. 96

1Headlights/Parking Lights

When the parking lights are on, the side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights will also switch on.

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

When the light switch is turned to or and the power is turned to OFF, a beeper sounds when the drivers door is opened.

When the light switch is turned to AUTO and the ambient light levels are low, the headlights and parking lights will switch on if you unlock a door. They will switch off when the door is locked.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 166

Lights

The lights will turn on automatically depending on the ambient brightness. They can also be switched on and off manually.

The exterior lights will switch on automatically when the light switch is set to AUTO while the power mode is in ON.

Manual operation Headlights/parking lights:

Turn the light switch to .

Parking lights:

Turn the light switch to .

Headlight/parking lights off: Turn the light switch to OFF and release it while the transmission is in (P or the parking brake is applied. u The lights will come back on automatically when:

The light switch is turned to OFF again and released. The transmission is changed out of (P or the parking brake is released.

Headlights/Parking Lights

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights C

o n

tro ls

1Headlights/Parking Lights

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follow:

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at

Max High Mid Low Min

U.S. models

Bright

Dark

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 167

When the headlights are on, push the lever forward. Pull the lever back to return to low beams.

Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back to switch on the high beams. u Release the lever to return to low beams.

High Beams

Continued 167* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

168

C o

n tro

ls

1Turn Signals

The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks.

2 Indicators P. 86

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 168

The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.

: Turn signal Push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.

: One-touch turn signal When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times. u If you lightly push the lever in the

opposite direction while it is blinking, the blinking will stop.

Turn Signals

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights C

o n

tro ls

1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

You can turn the headlight integration with wipers function on and off.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 169

The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the remote with you, and close the drivers door.

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the drivers door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

Headlight Integration with Wipers

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Continued 169* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights

170

C o

n tro

ls

1Daytime Running Lights

The daytime running lights come on dimmer when the headlight switch is in than when it is in AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark, the low beam headlights come on.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 170

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: The power mode is in ON. The headlight switch is AUTO or . The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

While the vehicle is stopped, if you turn the light switch to OFF and release it, the daytime running lights will turn off. When the transmission is changed out of (P and the parking brake is released, the lights will come on again. Otherwise, if the light switch is once more turned to OFF, the lights will come on again.

Daytime Running Lights

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C

o n

tro ls

1Auto High-Beam

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

For the auto high-beam to work properly: Do not place an object that reflects light on the

dashboard. Keep the windshield around the camera clean.

When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.

Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera.

Do not touch the camera lens.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 171

Auto High-Beam The front wide view camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

The power mode is in ON. The light switch is in AUTO. The lever is in the low beam position. The headlights have been automatically

activated. It is dark outside the vehicle.

If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.

How to Use the Auto High-Beam

Front Wide View Camera

Light Switch

Auto High-Beam Indicator

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

172

C o

n tro

ls

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.).

Surrounding light sources, such as street lights, electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.

The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes.

The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.

Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle. The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers. The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when: Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed. The camera has detected a dense fog.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 172

Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam:

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more. There are no preceding or

oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.

There are few street lights on the road ahead.

Switching to low beam:

One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 15 mph

(24 km/h) or less. There is a preceding or

oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.

There are many street lights on the road ahead.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C

o n

tro ls

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

How to turn off the Auto High-Beam System You can turn the auto high-beam system on and off.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.

Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor viewing condition. message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the

windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 173

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high- beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving. u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the

high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to . u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the

lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

173* Not available on all models

174

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

C o

n tro

ls

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.

NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield* to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 174

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.

MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Pull to use washer.

MIST

INT

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C

o n

tro ls

1Wipers and Washers

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 175

The rear wiper and washer can be used when the power mode is in ON.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.

Washer ( ) Sprays on the rear window while you rotate the switch to this position. Hold it to activate the rear wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, the washer spray will stop and the rear wiper will return to its selected switch setting after a few sweeps.

Operating in reverse When you put the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Rear Wiper/Washer

ON: Continuous wipe

OFF

INT: Intermittent

Washer

Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent) Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

176

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

C o

n tro

ls

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41F (5C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

Models with heated door mirror

1Heated Windshield Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 176

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror* button to defog the rear window and mirrors* when the power mode is in ON.

The rear defogger and heated door mirror* automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32F (0C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield at the wiper park area of the windshield when the power mode is in ON.

The heated windshield will automatically switch off after 15 minutes.

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 177

Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators. 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

To adjust

To lock

Lever

178

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 178

1Interior Rearview Mirror

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 180

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the AUTO indicator comes on.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*

Tab

Daytime Position

Night Position

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

Sensor

Auto Button

* Not available on all models

uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 179

Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.

Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

180

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 180

1Seats

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

1Front Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

1Adjusting the Seat Positions

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Front Seats Adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passengers seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.

Adjusting the drivers power seat*

Move back.

Allow sufficient space.

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 181

Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.

Drivers seat is shown.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.

Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.

181Continued* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuFront Seats

182

C o

n tro

ls

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 182

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Adjusting the Seat-Backs

uuSeatsuRear Seats C

o n

tro ls

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks.

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 183

Rear Seats

The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.

To fold down the seat 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the

latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.

2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 47

3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position.

4. Pull the release lever and fold down the seat-back.

To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position.

Folding Down the Rear Seats

Anchor Buckle

Latch Plate

Release Lever

uuSeatsuRear Seats

184

C o

n tro

ls

1Rear Seat Reminder

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the reminder comes on briefly, then the function is deactivated.

The reminder will not work if the power mode has not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating the rear doors.

The system does not detect passengers in the rear seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seats.

You can turn off the notification setting.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 184

This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the power mode was set to ON.

A reminder appears on the driver information interface and an alert will sound when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

Rear Seat Reminder

* Not available on all models

uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position C

o n

tro ls

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 185

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

186

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

C o

n tro

ls

1Adjusting the front head restraint positions

In order for the head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs. Do not place any objects between an occupant and

the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.

3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 186

Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupants ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Adjusting the front head restraint positions

Position head in the center of the head restraint.

uuSeatsuHead Restraints C

o n

tro ls

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

To remove and install the head restraints, recline the seat-back slightly forward as the space between the ceiling and the seat-back is limited.

3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 187

A passenger sitting in a back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

188

uuSeatsuArmrest

C o

n tro

ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 188

Armrest

The console compartment can be used as an armrest.

Using the Front Seat Armrest

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 189

Interior Convenience Items

C

o n

tro ls

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the drivers door but do not open

it. When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but

do not open a door.

You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2 Settings* P. 123

2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357

The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the drivers door. When you set the power mode to ON. When you close the drivers door in ACCESSORY

mode.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Interior Lights

ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When any doors are opened. You unlock the drivers door. When the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF.

OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Interior Light Switches

Door Activated Position

Off On

189Continued* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights

190

C o

n tro

ls

1Interior Light Switches

To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine is off.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

1Map Light Switches

When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the buttons or touch the map lights.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 190

Front seat The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the buttons.

Rear seat The map lights can be turned on and off by touching the map lights.

Map Light Switches

Touch

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 191

The cargo area lights come on when you open the tailgate.

Cargo Area Lights

192

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

C o

n tro

ls

1Glove Box

3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 192

Storage Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

Press the button to open the console compartment.

Glove Box

Console Compartment

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items C

o n

tro ls

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 193

Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.

Door beverage holders Are located on both of front and rear door side pockets.

Beverage Holders

Front seat

Rear seat

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

194

C o

n tro

ls

1Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

1Tie-down Anchors

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 194

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle.

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

Coat Hook

Tie-down Anchors

Anchors

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 195

Fold the cargo area floor lid into three parts.

Cargo Floor Box

196

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

C o

n tro

ls

1Accessory Power Socket

NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the accessory power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, only use the accessory power socket with the engine is running.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 196

Other Interior Convenience Items

The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.

Cargo area Open the cover to use it.

Accessory Power Socket

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Wireless Charger*

RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

In order to use safely: Remove any metal objects from the charge pad

before charging a device. Do not open the charger case. Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact

your dealer.

If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference: Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few

seconds to turn off the charger.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 197

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

1. To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button. u When the system is activated, the green

indicator light comes on. 2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area. u The system will automatically start

charging the device and the amber indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

3. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on. u Depending on the device, the amber

indicator light will stay on.

Wireless Charger*

Green Indicator

Charging Area

(Power) Button

Amber Indicator

Continued 197* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

198

C o

n tro

ls

1Wireless Charger*

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the users manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

3CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. Always remove foreign objects from

the charge pad before charging the device.

Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.

Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.

Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.

Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.

Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 198

When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator Cause Solution

Green &

Amber

Blinking simulta- neously

There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.

Remove the obstacle(s).

The device is not within the charging area.

Pick up and reset the device to the center of the charging area where is located.

The temperature of the wireless charger pad increases.

Temporarily suspend charging the device. Wait for the temperature to drop and attempt to charge the device again.

Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty. Contact a dealer for repairs.

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Wireless Charger*

The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the charging rate varies based on the device and other conditions.

NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision machines such as watches can be affected.

Qi and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: The device is already fully charged. The temperature of the device is extremely high

while charging. You are at a place that emits strong

electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.

The device has a cover, case or accessories which are not compatible with wireless charging.

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 199

Continued 199* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

200

C o

n tro

ls

1Wireless Charger*

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when: All the doors and the tailgate are closed

— to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.

The position of the device is altered.

Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

If the device becomes too hot and its battery protection function activates, it may charge extremely slowly or no longer charge. The temperature at which the battery protection function activates depends on the device.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 200

* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Heated Steering Wheel*

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 201

The heated steering wheel can be used when the power mode is in ON.

Press the button on the lower side of the steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

Heated Steering Wheel*

Continued 201* Not available on all models

uu Interior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

202

C o

n tro

ls

1Front Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 202

The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

Press the seat heater button: Once — The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice — The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times — The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times — The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

Front Seat Heaters*

* Not available on all models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 203

C

o n

tro ls

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO button indicator*/AUTO indicator* will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that were pressed will be controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial. 3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

Models without SYNC button

Dashboard vents

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents Floor and windshield defroster vents

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Temperature Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

AUTO Button

Fan Control Dial

(ON/OFF) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

MODE Control Dial

203Continued* Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

204

C o

n tro

ls

1Using Automatic Climate Control

Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 204

Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side

temperature control dial. 3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

Models with SYNC button

Dashboard vents

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents Floor and windshield defroster vents

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Drivers Side Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

MODE Control Button

(Recirculation) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Dial

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

Fan Control Dial

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 205

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

206

C o

n tro

ls

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 206

Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Models without SYNC button

Models with SYNC button

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C

o n

tro ls

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 207

To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.

Models without SYNC button

Models with SYNC button

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

208

C o

n tro

ls

1Synchronization Mode*

When the system is in dual mode, the drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature can be set separately.

When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 208

You can set the temperature synchronously for the drivers side and the passengers side in synchronization mode. 1. Press the SYNC button. u The system switches to synchronization mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using the drivers side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passengers side temperature control dial to return to dual mode.

Synchronization Mode*

Drivers Side Temperature Control Dial

Passengers Side Temperature Control Dial

SYNC Button

* Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C

o n

tro ls

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 209

Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.

Sensor

Sensor

210

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 210

lank.

This page intentionally left b

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 211

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System About Your Audio System……………. 212 USB Ports ………………………………….. 213 Audio System Theft Protection ……… 214 Audio Remote Controls……………….. 215

Audio System Basic Operation …….. 219 Adjusting the Sound …………………… 220 Display Setup …………………………….. 221 Playing AM/FM Radio ………………….. 222 Playing an iPod ………………………….. 224 Playing a USB Flash Drive …………….. 227 Playing Bluetooth Audio…………….. 230 Siri Eyes Free ……………………………… 234

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Smartphone Voice Recognition …….. 235 Apple CarPlay ……………………………. 236 Android AutoTM………………………….. 240

Audio System Basic Operation …….. 244 Start Up ……………………………………. 245 Audio/Information Screen ……………. 246 System Updates …………………………. 257 Adjusting the Sound …………………… 263 Display Setup …………………………….. 264 Voice Control Operation ……………… 266 Playing AM/FM Radio………………….. 269 Playing SiriusXM Radio ………………. 273 Playing an iPod ………………………….. 284

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Playing a USB Flash Drive …………….. 287 Playing Bluetooth Audio ……………. 290 HondaLink ………………………………. 293 Smart Shortcuts …………………………. 297 Wi-Fi Connection……………………….. 300 Apple CarPlay ……………………………. 301 Android AutoTM …………………………. 308

Audio Error Messages …………………. 314 General Information on the Audio System ……………………………………… 316

Customized Features ……………. 337, 345 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink….. 369, 389 Refuel Recommend …………………….. 408

212

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 212

1About Your Audio System

SiriusXM Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio*, contact a dealer.

2 General Information on the Audio System P. 316

SiriusXM Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM Radio service*. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.

*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen *2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Remote Controls

iPod

USB Flash Drive *2

*1

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports Featu

res

1USB Ports

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.

We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.

Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.

We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.

Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.

The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise to the radio station you are listening to.

USB charge

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 213

USB Ports On the front panel The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. u To prevent any potential issues, be sure

to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

On the undertray The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices. u You cannot play music even if you have

connected music players to them.

On the front panel

On the undertray

214

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 214

Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob for more than two

seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu

res

1Audio Remote Controls

Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some functions may not be available.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 215

Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FMAMUSB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/ Android AutoBluetooth Audio

VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Switch Press Up: To increase the volume. Press Down: To decrease the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons When listening to the radio

Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder/group. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder/group.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

SOURCE Button

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

216

Featu res

1Audio Remote Controls

Press the (Home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 216

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Switch Press Up: To increase the volume. Press Down: To decrease the volume.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch

(Home) Button

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 217

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons When listening to the radio

Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

218

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 218

Left Selector Wheel When selecting the audio mode

Press the (Home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

Roll up or down:

FM

AM

SXM

USB

Bluetooth

Apps (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

Back

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 219

Audio System Basic Operation

Featu

res

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Menu Items 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 220 2 Display Setup P. 221 2 Customized Features P. 337

Press the buttons on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215

Touchscreen operation Use simple gestures — including touching, swiping

and scrolling — to operate certain audio functions. Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction. You can select them when the vehicle is stopped. Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 337

To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to display the menu screen.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

(Back) Button

Selector Knob

MENU Button

Menu Display

220

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Featu res

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 220

Adjusting the Sound 1. Select an audio source. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select Sound Settings.

Select an item from the following choices: Bass / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader Speed Volume Compensation: Speed

Volume Compensation (SVC)

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu

res

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

You can adjust the settings by sliding or tapping on the bar.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 221

Display Setup You can set the screen brightness separately for Day and Night modes.

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Display Adjustment. 3. Select Day or Night. 4. Select the setting you want.

Changing the Screen Brightness

222

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Featu res

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 222

Playing AM/FM Radio

RADIO Button Press to select a band.

Seek Buttons

Press or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display beyond preset 5.>

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

You can store 12 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.

Switching the Audio Mode Press the audio source selecting button on the steering wheel.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the station name is displayed under the frequency. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the station name disappears.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 223

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.

Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.

Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select Text.

Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.

Radio Data System (RDS)

224

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Featu res

dicator rs when an iPod is connected.

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

n

Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 224

Playing an iPod Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

2 USB Ports P. 213

USB In Appea

MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected).

Track Buttons

Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information ScreeAlbum Art

Play/Pause Icon Select to play/pause a song.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

1Playing an iPod

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 225

1. Press to display the iPod music list.

2. Select a category.

3. Select an item. u Select an item repeatedly until a desired

item you want to listen to is displayed.

How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List

Item Selection

Category Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

226

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in

a selected list in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 226

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Shuffle/Repeat Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Shuffle Icon

Repeat Icon

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

dicator rs when a USB flash drive is connected.

EDIA Button ress to select USB flash drive (if connected).

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

andom Icons elect to play all files in the current category n random order.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 227

Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

2 USB Ports P. 213

USB In Appea

M P

Track Buttons

Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Play Icon Select to play a file.

R S i

Pause Icon Select to pause a file.

Repeat Icons Select to repeat the current file.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

228

Featu res

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 316

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 228

1. Press to display a folder list.

2. Select a folder.

3. Select a file.

How to Select a File from a Folder

Track Selection

Folder Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Random

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Repeat Repeat track: Repeats the current file. Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current

folder.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 229

You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select random or repeat icon.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Repeat Icons Random Icons

230

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

Featu res

1Playing Bluetooth Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there is more than one paired phone in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Bluetooth Settings menu.

2 HFL Menus P. 372 To change the searched phone manually, select Go to Device List.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting Audio from the Bluetooth device list.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 230

Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

MEDIA Button Press to select Bluetooth Audio.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Audio/Information ScreenBluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Track Buttons Press or to change files.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Play/Pause Icon Select to play/pause a file.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some phones.

If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

Check the volume setting of your phone if the audio volume is too loud or soft.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 231

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.

2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth Audio Source is selected.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.

To play or pause a file Select the play/pause icon.

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Play/Pause Icon MEDIA Button

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

232

Featu res

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 232

1. Press to display the music search list.

2. Select a category.

3. Select an item. u Select an item repeatedly until a desired

item you want to listen to is displayed.

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Item Selection

Category Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in

a selected list in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in

a selected list in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 233

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Shuffle/Repeat Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Shuffle Icon Repeat Icon

234

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free

Featu res

1Siri Eyes Free

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 234

Siri Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

Using Siri Eyes Free

(Talk) Button Press until the display changes as shown. Press and hold to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Voice Recognition Featu

res

1Using Smartphone Voice Recognition

Depending on your Android phone, you may need to operate your phone.

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 235

Smartphone Voice Recognition You can use Smartphone Voice Recognition using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your Android phone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

Using Smartphone Voice Recognition

(Talk) Button Press to activate Smartphone Voice Recognition. Press and hold to deactivate Smartphone Voice Recognition.

While in Smartphone Voice Recognition: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

Appears when Smartphone Voice Recognition is activated

236

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Featu res

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, press the PHONE button. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 238

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 236

Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

2 USB Ports P. 213

Apple CarPlay Menu

Go back to the audio screen

CONNECT Button Press to display Apple CarPlay screen

Apple CarPlay menu screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

To adjust the ringtone volume, the guidance volume of the navigation or Siri, or the audio volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 237

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.

Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

238

Featu res

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked. When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay: Press the MENU button Select Smartphone SettingsApple CarPlay Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 238

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable. 2 USB Ports P. 213

u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes. u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.

What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

To adjust the guidance volume of Siri, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while Siri is

activated.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 239

Press the (talk) button to activate Siri.

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

(Talk) button: Press to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri.

240

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Featu res

1Android AutoTM

We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 374

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Android Auto is a trademark of Google LLC.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 240

Android AutoTM

When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

2 USB Ports P. 213 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 242

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Featu

res

1Android AutoTM

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

To adjust the ringtone volume, the guidance volume of the navigation or voice recognition, or the audio volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 241

Maps Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Phone Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

Exit

Operate Android Auto with your voice.

Android Auto Menu

Go back to the audio screen

CONNECT Button Press to display Android Auto screen

Android Auto menu screen

Go back to the Android Auto menu screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

242

Featu res

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup: Press the MENU button Select Smartphone Settings Android Auto Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Googles Privacy Policy.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 242

You can check Android notifications.

(Android Auto Home) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed.

When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

To enable Android Auto after connecting an Android phone to the system, select Yes on the screen.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.

Auto Pairing Connection

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Featu

res

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function

by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.

To adjust the guidance volume of voice recognition, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the guidance is playing.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 243

Press the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

(Talk) button: Press to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press again to deactivate voice recognition.

244

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 244

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. (Home) button: Press to go to the home

screen. 2 Using the audio/information screen

P. 246

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen.

/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to change songs.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

/ (Seek/Track) Buttons

uuAudio System Basic OperationuStart Up Featu

res

1Start Up

Data Sharing Setting ON: Available the data communication. OFF: Not available the data communication.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 245

Start Up The 9-in. Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be displayed.

Select OK. u If you want to change the settings for

data upload, select Data Sharing, then select the ON/OFF settings on the Data Sharing Setting screen.

u If you do not select OK, the system will automatically be switched the home screen after a certain period of time.

u If there is no registered device, select OK and the Bluetooth pairing screen will be displayed.

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.

2. Select Honda HR-V from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

9-in. Color Touchscreen, select Search for Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.

u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be displayed.

246

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

1Using the audio/information screen

Touchscreen operation Use simple gestures — including touching, swiping

and scrolling — to operate certain audio functions. Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction. You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands. Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 246

Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Using the audio/information screen

Press the button to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

Phone Displays the HFL information.

2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 389

FM/AM/SiriusXM/USB/Bluetooth Audio Displays the audio information for each.

Switching the Display

Home Screen Button

All Apps

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 247

General Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 345

Navigation*

Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink Displays the HondaLink screen.

2 HondaLink P. 293

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

2 Apple CarPlay P. 301 2 Android AutoTM P. 308

Vehicle Settings Displays the vehicle settings screen.

2 Customized Features P. 345

247Continued* Not available on all models

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 248

Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip A Reset Timing or Trip B Reset Timing.

System Updates Updates the software version of the audio system.

2 System Updates P. 257

Clock Displays the clock.

Smart Shortcuts Displays the Smart Shortcuts screen.

2 Smart Shortcuts P. 297

Display Mode Displays the brightness bar.

Compass*

Displays the compass screen.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Wallpaper Setup

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface. When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be less than 64 bytes. The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 10 MB. The maximum image size is 4,096 2,304 pixels. If

the image size is less than 1,280 720 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.

If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 249

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper You can import up to 11 images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.

2 USB Ports P. 213

2. Press the button. 3. Select Clock. 4. Select Settings. 5. Select Clock Faces. 6. Select Add More. u The image of the pictures stored in the

USB flash drive are displayed on the list. 7. Select a desired picture to import. u Multiple pictures can be selected at the

same time. 8. Select OK. u The selected pictures are displayed.

9. Select Transfer. u It will return to the clock wallpaper

setting screen.

Wallpaper Setup

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

250

Featu res

1Wallpaper Setup

You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 250

Select wallpaper 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select a desired picture to set. u The preview is displayed on the screen.

6. Select Save. u The clock screen which the wallpaper has been set is displayed.

To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock.

Delete wallpaper 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Delete Photos. 6. Select a desired picture to delete. u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time.

7. Select OK. u The selected pictures are displayed.

8. Select Delete. u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Home Screen

The home screen has 3 pages. You can add up to 6 pages.

Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 251

To move to the next screen

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Home Screen

Swipe

Icon> Icon< Current page position

< >

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

252

Featu res

1To add app icons on the home screen

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368

In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 252

To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select All Apps. 3. Select the box checked on the desired apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1To move icons on the home screen

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 253

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.

4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

254

Featu res

1To remove icons on the home screen

You cannot delete the All Apps icon.

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 254

To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

3. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the header area. u The icon is removed from the home

screen. 4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to the header area.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1To shortcut icons on the home screen

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 255

To shortcut icons on the home screen You can store up to six icons on the bottom of the home screen.

1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

3. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to the bottom of the home screen. u The icon is a shortcut.

4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to shortcut icon.

Shortcut Icons

256

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 256

1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.

2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Press the button or select the system

status icon to close the area.

Status Area

Status Area

System Status Icon

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu

res

1How to Update

You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use the captive portal that require login or agreement the terms of use on the browser.

Your download will be canceled if: Your Wi-Fi connection is severed. You stop the engine when the battery is low on

power.

Your download will recommence the next time a Wi- Fi connection is established.

For the battery protection, Install While Vehicle Off cannot be selected when the battery is low on power. If you want to install the updated data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 257

System Updates The audio systems firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB device.

When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the status area. Use the following procedure to update the system.

1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on

the home screen, select All Apps. u The system will check for updates. u If the update icon appears on the home

screen, select the status icon. 2 Status Area P. 256

3. Select Download. u A notification appears on the screen for

the user to accept the download. 4. Select Install Now or Install While

Vehicle Off. u A notification appears on the screen if

the update is successful.

How to Update

Notification

258

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 258

The following settings can be set. Automatic Download Version Status Connection Setup Automatic Update*

Update History

Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Automatic Download. 5. Select the access point, then select Allow. u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Block.

View a version and update status Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Version Status.

System Updates Settings

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 259

Connection setup Use the following procedure to connect to the Internet via a Wi-Fi network. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. 5. Select OK. 6. Select an access point from the network list. u To connect to a hotspot that is not automatically detected, select Options

then Add Network. 7. Enter the password. u If you check the Use this network to automatically download system

updates box, you can set the network to be used for system updates. 8. Select Connect.

Automatic update settings*

Use the following procedure to change to the automatic update setting. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select Settings. 4. Select Automatic Update. 5. Select Accept. u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Decline.

259Continued* Not available on all models

260

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 260

View the update history Use the following procedure to confirm the update history. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select Settings. 4. Select Update History.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 261

Wireless connection mode setup 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. 5. Select OK. 6. Select an access point from the network list. u To connect to a hotspot that is not automatically detected, select Options

then Add Network. 7. Enter the password. u If you check the Use this network to automatically download system

updates box, you can set the network to be used for system updates. 8. Select Connect.

How to update 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select via Wireless. 4. Select Download. u A notification appears on the screen for the user to accept the download.

5. Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

How to Update Wirelessly

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

262

Featu res

1How to Update with a USB Device

A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.

Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 262

Download the update files from the server 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

3. Select Other Methods. 4. Select Via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.

5. Connect a USB device into the USB port. u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.

2 USB Ports P. 213

6. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 7. Connect the USB device into your computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to

https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

Update the audio system 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Other Methods. 4. Select Via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.

5. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen.

2 USB Ports P. 213

6. Select Install Now. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

How to Update with a USB Device

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Featu

res

1Adjusting the Sound

The Speed Volume Compensation adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Sound.

To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance / Fader, and Speed Volume Compensation, select Default on each setting screen.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 263

Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the button. 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound.

Select an item from the following choices: Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader Speed Volume Compensation: Set the

amount of volume increase.

264

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Featu res

1Display Setup

You can adjust the screen brightness by sliding or tapping on the brightness bar.

You can also change the screen brightness on the following procedures. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select the setting you want.

To reset the settings, select Default.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 264

Display Setup You can set the screen brightness.

Select Display Mode. u The brightness bar is displayed for a few

seconds. u Select or to adjust the brightness. u Select Display OFF to turn off the

screen. To turn on the screen, press the or button.

Switching Display Mode Manually

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 265

Select Audio Source in the header area, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Selecting an Audio Source

Limitations for Manual Operation

Select Audio Source Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Featu res

1Voice Control Operation

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 266

Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) button on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are

using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands:

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 267

Close the windows and moonroof. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your

command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

Voice Recognition

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 267

When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Help after the beep.

Depending on the selected mode, the displayed commands are different on the voice portal screen. The commands recognized are the same regardless of which screen is selected. Normal Mode: A list of example commands is displayed to quickly complete your desired function. Assist Mode: A list of basic commands is displayed to guide you step by step through the voice menu.

Voice Portal Screen

* Not available on all models

You can change the mode on the General Settings screen.

2 Voice Control P. 356

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free-form voice commands are not recognized.

When the voice portal screen is displayed, it will change to the top screen of each function by using the global commands. Music Search AM FM Sirius XM Navigation*

Phone

When the system recognizes a phone command, the screen will change to the dedicated phone voice recognition screen. These commands can only be used when a phone is connected.

General Commands

Phone Commands

Phone Commands Call Call The system only recognizes contact names stored in the phonebook of your phone. If a full name is registered in the first name field, the system will recognize the first name and last name as one contact name.

Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.

When the system recognizes an audio command, the screen will change to the dedicated audio voice recognition screen.

FM Commands Tune to

AM Commands Tune to

Sirius XM Commands Tune to SXM Tune to SXM

Audio Commands

268

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 268

iPod Commands List Album List Artist List Genre List Playlist Play Play Play Album Play Artist Play Genre Play Music Play Playlist Play Song

USB Commands List Album List Artist List Playlist Play Play Play Album Play Artist Play Music Play Playlist Play Song

* Not available on all models

The screen will change to the navigation screen when a navigation voice command is received.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Voice Help Cancel Back Voice Help provides guidance for the current screen.

Previous Next Yes No

Navigation Commands*

Standard Commands

List Commands

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM automatically.

e on-screen keyboard for entering ency directly.

formation Screen

can each station with a strong signal.

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display beyond preset 5.

>

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 269

Playing AM/FM Radio

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Seek Buttons Press or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Icon Select to use th the radio frequ

Audio/In

Scan Icon Select to s

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

270

Featu res

1Preset Memory

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215

You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and ARC logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 270

To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset station.

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh.

Preset Memory

Station List

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 271

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.

Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio Channels. 2. Select the channel number.

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.

Scan

HD Subchannel

Radio Data System (RDS)

272

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 272

Change the AM/FM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.

HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to analog only.

Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.

AM/FM Settings

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

e previous or next channel. apidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Settings Icon Select settings to display and customize SiriusXM settings.

to display and select a SiriusXM Radio category.

nformation Screen

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display beyond preset 5.

>

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 273

Playing SiriusXM Radio

Channel Icons Select or to th Select and hold to r

Category Icons Select or

Audio/I

Seek Buttons Press or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Album Art

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio

274

Featu res

1Playing SiriusXM Radio

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215

Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF.

To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 274

1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel or Category.

To Change the Tune Mode

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

1Playing SiriusXM Radio

You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

TuneMixTM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF.

When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 275

To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that channel. u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset channel.

Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.

1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create

TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no

available presets.

Preset Memory

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio

276

Featu res

1Listening to Featured Channels

Up to 10 featured channels by SiriusXM can be displayed.

To switch the sorting method, select Number or Name on the upper right of the screen.

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 276

Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM can be displayed and selected. 1. Select More. 2. Select Category List. 3. Select Featured Favorites. 4. Select the featured favorite list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.

5. Select the channel.

Listening to Featured Channels

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

1Replay Function

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon

When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the playback mode, the replayed segment is not displayed.

Audio/Information Screen

(C)

(B)

(A)

(D)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 277

The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channels broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channels broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .

To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.

Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold .

Replay Function

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio

278

Featu res

1Live Sports Alert

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert function.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 278

While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team.

To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select ON. 7. Select a favorite team.

Receiving a sports alert 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert. 2. Select Listen. u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.

2 Replay Function P. 277

To go back to the previous screen, select .

Live Sports Alert

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

1Traffic and Weather Information

When traffic and weather information is received, a notification is displayed in the header area.

2 Status Area P. 256

Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 279

You can receive traffic and weather information.

To set up a traffic & weather information 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select No Market

Selected.

Listening a traffic and weather information 1. Select the status icon. 2. Select the traffic and weather information. u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.

2 Replay Function P. 277

To go back to the previous screen, select .

Traffic and Weather Information

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio

280

Featu res

1Channel Schedule

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

1To set up an alert message

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert function.

Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.

To enable an alert message, change settings for the alert function.

2 To enable the alert function P. 281

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 280

You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.

To view a channel schedule 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule.

To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Every Time.

Channel Schedule

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 281

You can change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF.

To remove an alert 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete.

Manage Program Alert

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio

282

Featu res

1Scan

The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.

The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 282

Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan.

You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset.

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Scan

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 283

Change the SiriusXM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.

TuneMix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off. Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when

changing channels. 2 To Change the Tune Mode P. 274

Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets. 2 Scan P. 282

Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to a music channel preset.

2 Tune Start: P. 274

Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

2 Live Sports Alert P. 278

Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information. 2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 279

Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function. 2 Manage Program Alert P. 281

SiriusXM Settings

284

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Featu res

or to change songs. old to move rapidly within a song.

Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

/Information Screen

y/Pause Icon

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 284

Playing an iPod Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

2 USB Ports P. 213

Track Icons Select Select and h

Cover Art Audio

Pla

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

1Playing an iPod

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone or a smartphone is connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, the iPod/USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 285

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,

Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find

the song of your choice.

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

286

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in

a selected list in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 286

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle/Repeat Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Repeat Icon

Shuffle Icon

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

Random Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

o/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

or to change files. old to move rapidly within a track.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 287

Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1, FLAC, or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

2 USB Ports P. 213

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Track Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Audi

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Icons Select Select and h

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

288

Featu res

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 316

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 288

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,

Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find

the song of your choice.

How to Select a File from the Music Search List

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Random

Random off: Random mode to off. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random

order. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current

folder in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat track: Repeats the current file. Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current

folder.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 289

You can select repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Repeatedly select the random or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Repeat Icon

Random Icon

290

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

Featu res

1Playing Bluetooth Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there is more than one paired phone in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Bluetooth device list.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

The connected phone for Bluetooth Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth device list.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 290

Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

Audio/Information Screen

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Play/Pause Icon

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Track Icons Select or to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current track.

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 291

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.

To play or pause a file Select the play/pause icon.

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item. u The selection begins playing.

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Searching for Music

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

292

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a

selected list in random order.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song. Repeat Group: Repeats the current group. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 292

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle/Repeat Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your preference.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

Repeat Icon

Shuffle Icon

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

1HondaLink

The HondaLink connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 293

HondaLink HondaLink connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 300 2 Phone Setup P. 394

Connect Displays the connection status of the vehicle.

Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via roadside or customer service center.

Message Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

HondaLink Menu

294

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 294

Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink service.

To enable the HondaLink service 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Data Sharing Setting. 5. Select ON.

To link with HondaLink You can see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink when there is no connection to a network. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK.

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink Service

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 295

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a

new message in the header area.

2. A notification icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

Notification

296

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 296

3. Select the system status icon to see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts Featu

res

1Smart Shortcuts

The app also supports different profiles for each user, with customized learning for each profile. The app will also learn to associate a profile to a user over time based on key fob and connected phone data.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 297

Smart Shortcuts By observing and learning driver behaviors, patterns, and preferences, the system anticipates driver actions and presents on-screen suggestions to help perform desired actions quicker and with fewer steps.

The app will suggest actions based on what it learns you do often, and occasionally make recommendations based on your learned preferences.

The system will take some time to learn. The more you interact with the system, the more suggestion you will see, and the more accurate they will become.

Suggestions will automatically refresh periodically to provide updated content for each profile.

You can also provide feedback on whether a suggestion is helpful by pressing and holding on it. This can help the app grow smarter over time.

To change the notifications behavior for Smart Shortcuts: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Suggestion Settings. 3. Select an option. All data used for Smart Shortcuts can be erased by a Factory Data Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368

Smart Shortcuts Screen Shortcut Suggestion

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts

298

Featu res

1How to Use

You can change the profile by selecting on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.

You can customize the following items by selecting Options on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen. Profiles: Create, change, and manage profiles. View App Walkthrough: View the Smart

Shortcuts walkthrough. Suggestion Settings: Change where suggestions

can appear.

To create a profile: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Profiles. 3. Select Manage Profiles. 4. Select + Add New Profile. 5. Enter name for your profile. 6. Select Done. uA new profile has been created and the Smart App

will automatically switch to that profile.

To change a profile: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Profiles. 3. Select Change Current Profile. 4. Select a profile from the list. uThe change to the selected profile has been made.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 298

1. Press the button. 2. Select Smart Shortcuts. 3. Select a shortcut to take the action

suggested.

Call Suggestions: When selected, a call to the contact or number suggested will be placed and shown. Based on your calling patterns, contacts will be suggested for you to call. u Connect your smartphone through Bluetooth to get contact suggestions. u Call suggestions will not be displayed when you are connected to Apple

Carplay. Navigation Suggestions*: When selected, a route will be started to the

suggested destination and the embedded navigation app will open. u When a long route is set in your navigation system, you can receive

recommendations for gas stations and places to stop at along the way. u The places you frequently navigate to while using the embedded navigation

system will be suggested as shortcuts. u Save your home location in the embedded navigation app to have a shortcut

suggestion for it when youre away from home.

How to Use

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 299

Radio Suggestions: When selected, the corresponding radio app (FM, AM, or SiriusXM) will open and it will start playing the station. u From radio apps you can receive:

— FM, AM, SiriusXM: Most frequently listened stations you may like to play next. — FM, SiriusXM: Genre-based suggestions.

u Considerations: — FM suggestions will appear only when they are within range, according to your vehicles tuner signal. — SiriusXM suggestions will be available as long as there is an active account in the vehicle.

300

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Featu res

1Wi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

1Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the system status area. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 300

Wi-Fi Connection This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi- Fi hotspot or communication device.

1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select OK. 6. Select an access point from the network list. u To connect to a hotspot that is not

automatically detected, select Options then Add Network.

7. Enter the password. u If you check the Use this network to

automatically download system updates box, you can set the network to be used for system updates.

2 System Updates P. 257

8. Select Connect.

Turning off the Wi-Fi connection 1. Select Change Mode. 2. Select OFF.

Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF.

2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 303

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 301

Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port or wirelessly, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

2 USB Ports P. 213

Apple CarPlay Menu

Go back to the home screen

Home screen

Apple CarPlay icon

Apple CarPlay menu screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

302

Featu res

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 302

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.

Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Models with navigation system

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked. When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay: Press the buttonSelect General Settings Smartphone ConnectionApple CarPlay Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 303

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port or wirelessly, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.

1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable. 2 USB Ports P. 213

u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes. u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

304

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 304

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

5. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 6. Select Yes or No.

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Apple CarPlay device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Apple CarPlay. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

7. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 8. Select Yes or No.

Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 305

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

7. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 10. Select Yes or No.

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

3. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 6. Select Yes or No.

306

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 306

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. 2. Select OK. u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be

displayed. 3. Pair the iPhone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

4. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

5. Select Connect. 6. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,

accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 7. Select Yes or No.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.

What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 307

Press and hold the (talk) button to activate Siri.

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Featu res

1Android AutoTM

We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Android Auto is a trademark of Google LLC.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 308

Android AutoTM

When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

2 USB Ports P. 213 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 309

Maps Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Android Auto Menu

Android Auto menu screenHome screen

Android Auto icon Go back to the home screen

Go back to the Android Auto menu screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Featu

res

1Android AutoTM

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 309

Phone Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

Exit

Operate Android Auto with your voice.

You can check Android notifications. (Android Auto Home)

Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed.

When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Auto Pairing Connection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

310

Featu res

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup: Press the button Select General Settings Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select device

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Googles Privacy Policy.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 310

1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable. 2 USB Ports P. 213

u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes. u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

5. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

6. Select Yes or No.

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

Connect Android Auto Wirelessly

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 311

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Android Auto device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Android Auto. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

7. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

8. Select Yes or No.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

7. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

10. Select Yes or No.

312

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 312

Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

3. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

6. Select Yes or No.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. 2. Select OK. u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be

displayed. 3. Pair the Android phone to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 394

4. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

5. Select Connect. 6. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto

connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

7. Select Yes or No.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Featu

res

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function

by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 313

Press and hold the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

314

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 314

Solution

e is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn gain. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

sh drive are copyright protected or an unsupported for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.

empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or

d on the device.

e is connected. If it appears when a supported evice.

iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen *2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Error Message

Bad USB Device Please check owners manual*1

Appears when an incompatible devic the audio system off and turn it on a error.

Connect Retry*1, *2 Appears when the system does not

Unplayable File*1, *2 Appears when the files in the USB fla format. This error message appears

No Data*1, *2

Appears when the iPod is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is WAV files in the USB flash drive.

Check that compatible files are store

Unsupported*1, *2 Appears when an unsupported devic device is connected, reconnect the d

iPod

USB flash drive

iPod and USB flash drive

uuAudio Error Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 315

*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen *2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Error Message Solution

Device No Response*1, *2 Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

USB hub not supported*1, *2 Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the HUB.

A charging error has occurred with the connected USB device. When safe please check the compatibility of the device and USB cable and try again.*1, *2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

316

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 316

General Information on the Audio System

1Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: U.S.: SiriusXM Radio at www.siriusxm.com/

subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349 Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/

subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079

1Receiving SiriusXM Radio

The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle. In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack

SiriusXM Radio Service*

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel 0.

2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.

Switch to the SiriusXM mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1

You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM tuner. Contact a dealer. Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted: There is a problem with the SiriusXM antenna. Contact a dealer.

*1: ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon the channel selected.

Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Receiving SiriusXM Radio

SiriusXM Radio Display Messages

* Not available on all models

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives Featu

res

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).

The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s*1.

USB works with iPhone 4s*1, iPhone 5, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 317

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.

*1: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen *2: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Model Made for iPod touch (6th to 7th generation) released between 2015 and 2019 Made for iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/ iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/iPhone SE (2nd generation)/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 12 mini

Model Made for iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015 Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/ iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/ iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/ iPhone SE (2nd generation)/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/ iPhone 12 mini

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

USB Flash Drives

318

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 318

Honda App License Agreement

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS AGREEMENT) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR VEHICLE) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE SERVICES). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (HONDA, US, WE, OR OUR), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO HONDA IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDAS PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A PROVIDER). REFERENCE TO A PROVIDER IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDERS PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a DEALER). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, HONDA SERVICES); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, PROVIDER SERVICES), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.

2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the HONDA TERMS). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 319

3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDAs distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.

4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the PROVIDER TERMS). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.

5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any DOCUMENTATION). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.

320

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 320

(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:

6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.

(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone elses use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 321

7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.

C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.

2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid drivers license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.

3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.

4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.

322

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 322

5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.

6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the- air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDAs discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.

7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.

D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicles current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 323

2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.

3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.

4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.

324

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 324

E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.

2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.

(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (VEHICLE INFORMATION) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.

(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicles geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.

(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLESs multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLEs multimedia system is your sole responsibility.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 325

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non- infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorneys fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

326

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 326

2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.

(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 327

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLEs compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

328

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 328

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (FAA) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. Claim means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. Claim does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 329

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDAs prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

330

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 330

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

OWNERS MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 331

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (THE APPLICATIONS) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDAS TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

332

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 332

About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select License.

1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information. 6. Select License.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 333

License Information

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

Bluetooth

Windows Media

334

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 334

Made for iPod, and Made for iPhone, mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, iPod, iPhone, iTunes, Siri and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Apple

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 335

Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (VC-1 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

MPEG

336

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 336

AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 337

Featu

res

1Customized Features

When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. Shift to (P.

To customize features detail, refer to the following. 2 Customization flow P. 338 2 List of customizable options P. 341

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU button. To customize the phone settings, press the PHONE button, then select Settings.

How to Customize the Settings

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Audio/Information Screen

MENU Button

Selector Knob

PHONE Button

338

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 338

Customization flow

Press the MENU button.

Sound Settings

Bluetooth Settings

Bass / Treble

Balance / Fader

Speed Volume Compensation

Connect New Device

Change Device

Priority Device

Clock Settings

Smartphone Settings

Disconnect All Device

Delete Device

Automatic Time

Set Time

Time Zone

Apple CarPlay

Android Auto

Daylight Saving Time

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 339

RDS Settings

Display Adjustment

RDS Information

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Day

Night

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Language

Display OFF

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

License

Factory Data Reset

Rear Camera Setting

Cross Traffic Monitor*

339Continued* Not available on all models

340

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 340

Press the PHONE button and select Settings.

Bluetooth Settings

Ringtone

Connect New Device

Change Device

Priority Device

Disconnect All Device

Delete Device

Vehicle

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Phone

Hands-Free System Clear

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 341

List of customizable options Press the MENU button.

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Sound Settings

Bass / Treble Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 220

Balance / Fader Speed Volume Compensation

Bluetooth Settings

Connect New Device Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 374

Change Device Connects a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 374

Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. ON*1/OFF Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Delete Device Deletes a paired phone.

Clock Settings

Automatic Time Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

ON*1/OFF

Daylight Saving Time Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time.

ON/OFF*1

Set Time Adjusts time. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134

Time Zone Changes the time zone manually.

Smartphone Settings Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection.

RDS Settings RDS Information Selects whether the RDS information comes on.

ON*1/OFF

342

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 342

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Display Adjustment

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen.

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen.

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen.

Day Changes between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and display off mode.

Night Display OFF

Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Normal*1/High

Rear Camera Setting

Fixed Guideline Shows the guideline that does not move with the steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 ON*1/OFF

Dynamic Guideline Shows the guideline that moves with the steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 ON*1/OFF

Cross Traffic Monitor* Shows arrows on the rear camera image to indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor* P. 542 ON*1/OFF

Language Changes the display language. English*1/Espaol/Franais License Shows the legal information.

Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 344

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

n Selectable Settings

device. ON*1/OFF from HFL.

Phone*1/Vehicle

ansfer from your er the vehicle.

ON*1/OFF

in the Phone

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 343

Press the PHONE button and select Settings.

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Descriptio

Bluetooth Settings

Connect New Device Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 374

Change Device Connects a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 374

Priority Device Sets a device as the priority Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone Delete Device Deletes a paired phone.

Ringtone Selects the ringtone.

Auto Phone Call Transfer Sets calls to automatically tr phone to HFL when you ent

Hands-Free System Clear Resets all customized items Settings group as default.

344

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Featu res

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 344

Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

3. Select Yes to reset the settings. 4. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 345

Featu

res

1Customized Features

When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. Shift to (P.

To customize features detail, refer to the following. 2 Customization flow P. 346 2 System P. 350 2 Smartphone Connection P. 353 2 Connections P. 354 2 Display P. 355 2 Sound P. 355 2 Camera P. 356 2 Voice Control P. 356

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select General Settings and select a setting item.

How to Customize the General Settings

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Audio/Information Screen

346

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 346

Customization flow

Press the button. Automatic Date & Time

Set Date

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Set Date & Time

Time Zone

System Sounds

Date & Time

System

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Date Format

Time Format

Text-to-Speech

Navigation Guidance

Phone Calls

Set Time

(Select time zone)

System Volumes

Language

Default

Select General Settings.

Automatic Time Zone*

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Status

gal Information

Build Number

Model Number

ndroid Version

Kernel Version

App Manager

nnect New Device

(Saved Devices)

nnect New Device

(Saved Devices)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 347

Factory Data Reset

Le

Data Sharing Setting

A

Detail Information

Refuel Recommend*

About

+ CoApple CarPlay Smartphone Connection

Android Auto + Co

347Continued* Not available on all models

348

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Options

Options

Saved Networks

Change Mode

ailable Networks/ nnected Devices)

nnect New Device

(Saved Devices)

Bluetooth

Priority Device

Add Network

Setup Network SSID

Wi-Fi Band

Security

Password

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 348

Connections

Display

Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Black Level

Default

Contrast

(Av Co

+ Co

Brightness

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Treble

Midrange

Bass

Fixed Guideline

namic Guideline

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 349

Cross Traffic Monitor

Bass / Treble

Camera Dy

Voice Control Mode

Rear Camera

Sound

Voice Control

Speed Volume Compensation

Balance / Fader

350

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 350

System

*1:Default Setting *2:Default Setting for U.S. models *3:Default Setting for Canadian models

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Date & Time

Set Date & Time

Automatic Date & Time

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

ON*1/OFF

Set Date Adjusts date. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134

Day/Month/Year

Set Time Adjusts time. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134

Hour/Minute AM/PM

Time Zone

Automatic Time Zone*

Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.

ON*1/OFF

(Select time zone)

Changes the time zone manually.

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time. ON*1/OFF

Date Format Select a date format. MM/DD/YYYY*2/ DD/MM/YYYY*3/ YYYY/MM/DD

Time Format Select a time format. 12H*1/24H

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 351

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Language Changes the driver information interface and audio/ information screen language separately.

English*1/Espaol/ Franais

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Normal*1

System Volumes

System Sounds Sets the system sound volume level.

Text-to-Speech Sets the text-to-speech volume level.

Navigation Guidance

Sets the navigation guidance volume level.

Phone Calls Sets the phone call volume level.

Default Resets all System Volumes settings to default values.

Data Sharing Setting

Turns the data sharing setting on and off. 2 Start Up P. 245

ON*1/OFF

Refuel Recommend* Turns the refuel recommend function on and off. 2 Refuel Recommend P. 408

ON*1/OFF

351Continued* Not available on all models

352

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 352

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

About

Status

Displays the Android setting items.

Legal Information

Model Number

Android Version

Kernel Version

Build Number

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368

Continue/Cancel

Detail Information

App Manager Displays the Android system memory and apps information.

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 353

Smartphone Connection

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Apple CarPlay

+ Connect New Device Pairs a new phone to Apple CarPlay. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

Android Auto

+ Connect New Device Pairs a new phone to Android Auto. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

354

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 354

Connections

*1:Default Setting *2:Appears only when Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected wirelessly.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Wi-Fi

Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode. Network*1/ Smartphone*2/OFF

(Available Networks/Connected Devices)

Displays the available network(s) or current connected device(s).

Options Add Network Adds a new network to connect Wi-Fi.

Saved Networks Saves the connected network.

Setup

Network SSID Sets the network name.

Security Displays the network security.

Password Sets password for require entering password when connecting Wi-Fi device to the network.

Wi-Fi Band Displays the Wi-Fi band.

Bluetooth

Options Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth on and off. ON*1/OFF

Priority Device Displays the priority device.

+ Connect New Device Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

(Saved Devices) Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 394

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 355

Display

Sound

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.

Default Resets all customized settings for the brightness, contrast, and black level.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Bass / Treble

Treble

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 263

Midrange

Bass

Balance / Fader

Speed Volume Compensation

356

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 356

Camera

*1:Default Setting

Voice Control

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Rear Camera

Fixed Guideline Shows the guideline that does not move with the steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 ON*1/OFF

Dynamic Guideline Shows the guideline that moves with the steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 ON*1/OFF

Cross Traffic Monitor Shows arrows on the rear camera image to indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor* P. 542 ON*1/OFF

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Voice Control Mode Selects a mode of the voice portal screen. 2 Voice Control Operation P. 266

Assist/Normal*1

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 357

With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings and select a setting item.

How to Customize the Vehicle Settings

Audio/Information Screen

358

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 358

Customization flow

Press the button.

Forward Collision Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Blind Spot Info

Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning

Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting

Driver Attention Monitor

Driver Assist System Setup

TPMS Calibration*

Select Vehicle Settings.

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Display

Units

ht Flash

nder

ode

Beep

ON/OFF

tion

. Display

iming

ming

lume

cklight

r

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 359

Turn By Turn Auto

Speed/Distance

Keyless Access Lig

Rear Seat Remi

Door Unlock M

Keyless Access

Remote Start System

Lockout Protec

Keyless Access Setup

Meter Setup Adjust Outside Temp

«Trip A» Reset T

«Trip B» Reset Ti

Adjust Alarm Vo

Fuel Efficiency Ba

Tachomete

360

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

lock

ock

o Lock

ing

er Back

am

ing Time

FF Timer

itivity*

ith Wiper On

Control

ems

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 360

Auto Door Un

Auto Door L

Walk Away Aut

Lock Presett

Keyless Lock Answ

Door/Window Setup

Lighting Setup Auto High Be

Interior Light Dimm

Headlight Auto O

Auto Light Sens

Auto Headlight On w

Remote Window

Select Reset ItMaintenance Info.

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 361

TPMS Calibration*

Driver Assist System Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 438

Calibrate/Cancel

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Selects distance for Forward Collision Warning audible and visual alerts.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 453 Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Turns On/Off audible notification when vehicle has moved in/out of adaptive cruise control range.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 471 ON/OFF*1

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system. 2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Selects On/Off the LKAS alert for not detecting road lines. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491

ON/OFF*1

361Continued* Not available on all models

362

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 362

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Blind Spot Info Selects On/Off the blind spot information system audible alert. 2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 445

Audible And Visual Alert*1/ Visual Alert

Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting

Displays the traffic sign recognition system on instrument panel. 2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519

Display*1/None

Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning

Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded. 2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519

ON*1/OFF

Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting

Select speed limit warning threshold based on personal preference. 2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519

Speed Limit*1/ Speed Limit +3mph/ Speed Limit +5mph/ Speed Limit +10mph (When mph is selected) Speed Limit*1/ Speed Limit +5km/h/ Speed Limit +10km/h/ Speed Limit +15km/h (When km/h is selected)

Driver Attention Monitor Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor. 2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 114

OFF/Tactile Alert/Tactile And Audible Alert*1

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 363

Meter Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Selects to adjust outside temperature reading by a few degrees. 2 Outside Temperature P. 105

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

«Trip A» Reset Timing Selects the timing to reset Trip A.

2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 109 2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 111

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

«Trip B» Reset Timing Selects the timing to reset Trip B.

2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 109 2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 111

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening warning and indicator. High/Mid*1/Low

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Turn By Turn Auto Display Turns on/off the pop-up warning in the turn-by-turn navigation in the driver information interface.

2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 113 ON*1/OFF

Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units. 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122

km/h km/mph miles*1 (U.S.) km/h km*1/mph miles (Canada)

Tachometer Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver information interface.

ON*1/OFF

Rear Seat Reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

364

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 364

Keyless Access Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF

Remote Start System ON/ OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Lockout Protection Changes the settings for the lockout protection function. ON*1/OFF

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 365

Lighting Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Auto High Beam Turns on/off auto high beam function. ON*1/OFF

Interior Light Dimming Time Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are closed.

2 Interior Lights P. 189 60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight Auto OFF Timer Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door.

2 Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 169 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Auto Light Sensitivity* Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

Auto Headlight On with Wiper On

Selects On/Off headlight function and wiper operation when the headlight is in AUTO setting.

2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 169 ON*1/OFF

365Continued* Not available on all models

366

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 366

Door/Window Setup

*1:Default Setting

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift From P

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.

OFF/All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors With IGN OFF

Walk Away Auto Lock Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle.

ON/OFF*1

Lock Presetting Changes the settings for the Lock Presetting function. ON*1/OFF

Keyless Lock Answer Back Turns on/off flash of exterior lights when doors are locked/unlocked by the keyless remote.

2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 155 ON*1/OFF

Remote Window Control Turns the remote window control on and off. ON*1/OFF

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 367

Maintenance Info.

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Maintenance Info. Resets the maintenance information. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 555

Select Reset Items

368

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Featu res

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink because it goes offline.

2 HondaLink P. 293

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 368

Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. 5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.

1. Press the button. 2. Select Vehicle Settings. 3. Select Default. 4. Select Yes.

Defaulting General Settings

Defaulting Vehicle Settings

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 369

Featu

res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 20 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 382

Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Selector Knob

Left Selector Wheel PHONE Button

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL

370

Featu res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 370

Left Selector Wheel: While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.

2 Receiving a Call P. 387

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu

res

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 371

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

HFL Status Display

Limitations for Manual Operation

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. Roam Status

Call Name Call Number

372

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth— compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.

the system.

ed phone.

the priority device.

missed calls.

contacts list.

ired phone from the system.

usly paired phone.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 372

HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

PHONE button

Recent Calls*1 All

Pair a phone toConnect New Device

Change Device Connects a pair

Priority Device Sets a device as

Bluetooth Settings

Keypad*1

Settings

Favorite Contacts*1 (Existing entry list)

Contacts*1

Dialed

Missed

Received

Display the last outgoing, incoming and

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last missed calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Dial the selected number in the favorite

Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Enter a phone number to dial.

Disconnect All Device Disconnect a pa

Delete Device Delete a previo*1: Available only when a phone is connected to HFL.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

ne stored in the connected cell phone.

ne stored in HFL.

our phone to HFL when you

all favorite contacts entries, all book data.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 373

Ringtone Select the ringtoPhone

Vehicle Select the ringto

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Hands-Free System Clear

Set calls to automatically transfer from y enter the vehicle.

Clear the phone settings, paired phones, call history data, and all imported phone

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

374

Featu res

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is

connected to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to the Bluetooth Settings screen.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL.

When pairing a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesnt appear on the audio/ information screen, select Search from phone and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select Honda HR-V.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 374

To pair a cell phone (No phone has been paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode. 3. Select Yes. u The audio system will enter a waiting

mode for pairing.

4. Select Honda HR-V from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts. When your phone appears on the list, select it.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 375

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to

a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.

2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

4. Select Connect New Device. u The audio system will enter a waiting

mode for pairing.

376

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 376

5. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.

6. Select Honda HR-V from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts. When your phone appears on the list, select it.

7. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

8. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful. u You can prioritize a Bluetooth device at

the same time. Select Yes if you want to prioritize the device.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 377

To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

4. Select Change Device. u The screen changes to a device list.

5. Select a desired device name. 6. Select Both, Audio, or Phone. u When another device is connected to

Android Auto and you select Both or Phone, a confirmation message appears. Select Continue.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

378

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 378

To delete a paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

4. Select Delete Device. u The screen changes to a device list.

5. Select a phone you want to delete.

6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. u When the device is connected to Android

Auto, a confirmation message appears. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res1Ringtone

Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the speakers.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 379

If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 4. Select ON or OFF.

You can change the ringtone setting. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Ringtone. 4. Select Phone or Vehicle.

Automatic Transferring

Ringtone

380

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 380

Phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.

1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Hands-Free System Clear. 4. Select Yes.

5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

6. A notification appears on the screen. Select OK.

To Clear the System

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to five category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Pager

Work

Fax

Car

Other

Voice

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 381

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

382

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 382

To add a favorite contacts 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.

3. Select the star icon.

3. Select Add to Favorite. u A notification appears on the screen if

the favorite contact is successfully stored. u To remove the favorite contact, select

the star icon again.

Favorite Contacts Recent Calls Screen

Star Icon Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Keypad Screen

Add to Favorite

On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen

On the Keypad screen

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 383

To delete a favorite contact 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select the star icon. 4. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

Star Icon

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

384

Featu res

1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 384

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

To make a call using the imported phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Contacts. 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.

Select a name. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

Making a Call

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 385

To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. 4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or

Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

386

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 386

To make a call using a favorite contact 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Select Swap Calls using the left selector wheel to return to the current call. Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Select Hang Up using the left selector wheel if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the icons on the driver information interface.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 387

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call… screen appears.

You can answer the call using the left selector wheel. To pick the call, roll up or down to select Answer on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel. u If you want to decline or end the call,

select Ignore on the driver information interface using the left selector wheel.

Receiving a Call

HFL Mode

Callers Name

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

388

Featu res

1Options During a Call

Keypad: Available on some phones.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 388

The following options are available during a call. Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Options During a Call

Mute Icon

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 389

Featu

res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay, HFL is unavailable.

2 Customized Features P. 345

Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.

Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.

To change the volume level, the volume level is able to change by the audio systems volume.

If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 400

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

(Talk) Button

Left Selector Wheel

VOL (+/VOL (- (Volume) Switch

(Home) Button

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL

390

Featu res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 390

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. (Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information

interface. Left Selector Wheel: Press the (Home) button. Roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel. While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.

2 Receiving a Call P. 404

To go to the phone screen: 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu

res

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 391

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

2 Favorite Contacts P. 400

HFL Status Display

Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Callers Name (If registered)/Callers Number (If not registered)

392

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth— compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

atically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

r delete a paired device.

e system.

e to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

ected cell phone.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 392

HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone settings screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings.

Set phonebook and call history data to be autom

+ Connect New Device

(Existing entry list) Connect, disconnect, o

Change Devices Pair a new phone to th

Auto Sync Phone

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Ringtone

HondaLink Assist

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phon

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the conn

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

n the favorite contacts list.

calls.

incoming and missed calls.

lls.

calls.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 393

Phone menu screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone.

Dial the selected number i

All

(Existing entry list)

Display the last outgoing

Recent Calls Display the last outgoing,

Favorite Contacts

Contacts

Keypad

Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Enter a phone number to dial.

Dialed

Display the last missed caMissed

Display the last incoming Received

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

394

Featu res

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands- free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to the system.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.

: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth— compatible devices is unavailable.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 394

Bluetooth setup You can turn Bluetooth function on and off. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then select ON.

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Select Phone. 2. Select Connect New Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode. 4. Select Honda HR-V from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

audio system, select Search for Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the

screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

6. Select desired functions and then select Connect.

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 395

7. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

8. Select OK. u A confirmation message for phone data

collection appears. 9. Select ON or OFF. u A confirmation message for HondaLink

Assist appears. 10. Select Yes or No.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

396

Featu res

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 396

To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired phone.

u You can set the connected phone priority. Select the box checked on the phone you want to prioritize.

4. Select , , or . u and can be selected

simultaneously, however, when or is selected, and cannot be

selected. 5. Select Apply.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 397

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone you want to delete. 4. Select Options.

5. Select Delete Device. 6. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Delete.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

398

Featu res

1Ringtone

Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 398

You can change the ringtone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Ringtone

Automatic Transferring

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

Pref

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 399

When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

400

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 400

To add a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.

3. Select the star icon.

3. Select Add to Favorite Contacts. u A notification appears on the screen if

the favorite contact is successfully stored. u To remove the favorite contact, select

the star icon again.

Favorite Contacts Recent Calls Screen

Star Icon

Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Keypad Screen

Add to Favorite Contacts

On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen

On the Keypad screen

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 401

To edit a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry

you want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want. 5. Select Done.

To delete a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry

you want to delete. 4. Select Remove. 5. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

402

Featu res

1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 402

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Select Phone. 2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name. u You can sort by First Name or Last

Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

Making a Call

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To make a call using the Call History

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, missed, or received calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 403

To make a call using a phone number 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for

entering numbers. 4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or

Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a favorite contacts entry

1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. u You can change the order of favorite

contacts entries by selecting Reorder. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

404

Featu res

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Select using the left selector wheel to return to the current call. Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Select if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and on the driver information interface.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 404

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call… screen appears.

You can answer the call using the left selector wheel. To pick the call, roll up or down to select (answer) on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel. u If you want to decline or end the call,

select (ignore) on the driver information interface using the left selector wheel.

Receiving a Call

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Options During a Call

Keypad: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 405

The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected when the other source screen other than the phone screen is displayed. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Options During a Call

406

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHondaLink Assist

Featu res

1In Case of Emergency

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage

areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,

such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 406

HondaLink Assist

Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicles location may not be sent to the operator.

In Case of Emergency

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHondaLink Assist Featu

res

1To enable notification

Setting options: Yes: Notification is available. No: Disable the feature.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 407

To enable notification 1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 392

2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select Yes or No.

408

Featu res

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 408

1Refuel Recommend

You can turn the Refuel Recommend function on and off.

2 Customized Features P. 345

When you turn off this feature, the refuel recommend notification will not display.

This feature can only be used when the fuel level in the tank is below 30 percent.

If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel Recommend.

When you drive on a rough road or ascend or descend a hill for an extended period of time, the notification may disappear or may not be displayed at all.

Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel. This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.

1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a notification is displayed and a notification icon is displayed in the header.

2. Touch the box that contains the icon.

3. Select Find Gas Station Now.

4. Choose a gas station from the search screen of the navigation system. u For instructions on how to use the

navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

Models with navigation system

Notification icon

* Not available on all m

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 409

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving Driving Preparation ………………………… 410 Maximum Load Limit………………………. 413

Towing a Trailer Towing Behind a Motorhome…………… 415

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ….. 416 When Driving

Starting the Engine ………………………… 418 Precautions While Driving………………… 425 Continuously Variable Transmission ……… 426 Shifting ………………………………………… 427 Drive Mode Switch…………………………. 429 Hill Descent Control System …………….. 432

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ……………….434

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM* .. 437 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)……….. 438 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — Required Federal Explanation …………. 443

Blind Spot Information System* ……….. 445 Honda Sensing ………………………….. 449

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ……………………………………. 453

Low Speed Braking Control*……………. 465 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow ………………………………. 471

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) …….491 Traffic Jam Assist* …………………………..502 Road Departure Mitigation System …….511 Traffic Sign Recognition System…………519 Front Wide View Camera………………….525 Sonar Sensors* ……………………………….527

Braking Brake System………………………………….528 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)…………….535 Brake Assist System …………………………536

Parking Your Vehicle Multi-View Rear Camera……………… 545 Refueling Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions…. 550

410

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 410

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.

Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.

Exterior Checks

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D

rivin g

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 411

Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413

Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149

Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.

2 Seats P. 180 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 186

Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2 Mirrors P. 178 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 177

Interior Checks

412

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 412

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the drivers ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44

Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 86

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D

rivin g

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo.

2 Specifications P. 640

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2 Specifications P. 640

3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 413

Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 838 lbs (380 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit — (1)Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 — 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Label Example

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

414

D rivin

g

1Maximum Load Limit

Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

2 Towing a Trailer P. 415

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 414

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load 838 lbs

(380 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight 538 lbs

(244 kg)

Example2

Max Load 838 lbs

(380 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 88 lbs

(40 kg)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 415

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Towing Behind a Motorhome Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2 Emergency Towing P. 634

416

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 416

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

2 Important Handling Information P. 36 2 Precautions While Driving P. 425

3WARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or off- pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owners manual.

Keep your speed low, and dont drive faster than conditions permit.

General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations: Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413

Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. Its up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 417

Avoiding Trouble Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all

scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.

Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.

Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.

Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.

Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you cant clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, dont try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.

Crossing a Stream — Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.

If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.

418

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 418

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up to electric parking brake switch.

2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N , it is safer to start it in (P.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Brake Pedal

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting the Engine

Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 614

The engine may not start if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.

2 Immobilizer System P. 156

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 419

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

420

D rivin

g

1Remote Engine Start*

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 420

You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.

To start the engine Press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash once.

If the engine starts successfully, some exterior lights flash six times.

If the engine does not start, exterior lights will not flash. u Go within the range, and try again.

Remote Engine Start*

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Remote Engine Start*

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: You have disabled a remote engine start setting

using the driver information interface* or audio/ information screen*.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF. The transmission is in a position other than (P. The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is

unlocked. You have already used the remote twice to start

the engine. Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle. There is any antenna failure. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The engine oil pressure is low. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The security system alarm is not set.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 421

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously. To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was

transmitted successfully.

Continued 421* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

422

D rivin

g

1Remote Engine Start*

The engine may stop while it is running if: You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of

starting the engine with the keyless remote. The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote. The security system alarm is not set. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is

unlocked. You press the shift lever release button. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The battery is low. The engine oil pressure is low. The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is

a problem with the emissions control systems.

While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: The climate control system is activated in

recirculation mode. When it is cold outside: The defroster is activated at a moderately warm

temperature. The rear defogger, heated door mirrors*, front seat

heaters* and heated steering wheel* are activated. 2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Button P. 176 2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 202 2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 201

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 422

To stop the engine Press and hold the button for one second.

If the engine starts successfully, the exterior lights flash once.

When the remote is out of the keyless access system range, the exterior lights will not flash. The engine will not stop. u Go within the range, and try again.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting to Drive

The engine stops when the transmission is taken out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote*

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA is switched off.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 423

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into (D. Select (R when reversing.

2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 528

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Put the transmission into (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote*

When the engine was started in any case

Continued 423* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

424

D rivin

g

1Stopping the Engine

The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions have been met: A door has been opened, such as when leaving the

vehicle. The drivers seat belt is not fastened. The transmission is in (P.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 424

You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Stopping the Engine

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving D

rivin g

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE Do not change the shift position while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not select (N while driving as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 425

Precautions While Driving

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof. Roof load capacity is 132 lbs (60 kg), available roof racks/carriers may have lower

capacities. Please check accessorys information (Honda accessory).

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

In Rain

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission

426

D rivin

g

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

2 Important Handling Information P. 36 2 Precautions While Driving P. 425

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 426

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

Continuously Variable Transmission

When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Other Precautions

Creeping

Kickdown

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 427

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift positions

Park Used when parking or starting the engine

Reverse Used when reversing

Neutral Transmission is not locked

Drive Used for normal driving

Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hillsRelease Button

Low Used to further increase engine

braking Used when going up or down hills

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

428

D rivin

g

1Shift Operation

NOTICE When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 428

Shift Operation

Tachometer red zone

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission system indicator)

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch D

rivin g

1Drive Mode Switch

The mode may not be able to be changed when: The vehicle is turning. The VSA system is activating. There is a problem with the engine, the

transmission, the VSA, and the EPS.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 429

Drive Mode Switch You can choose between three modes, NORMAL mode, ECON mode and SNOW mode by using the drive mode switch. The current mode is displayed on the driver information interface, and each mode will appear differently.

Drive Mode Switch

NORMAL Mode

ECON Mode

SNOW Mode

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch

430

D rivin

g

1ECON Mode

While in ECON mode, the climate control system will be less effective and the vehicle slower to accelerate.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 430

Balances handling and riding in all environments.

Helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission and climate control system.

NORMAL Mode

ECON Mode

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch D

rivin g

1SNOW Mode

NOTICE SNOW mode does not allow you to drive on snowy or frozen roads in all situations. There are limits to SNOW mode. When driving on snowy or frozen roads; mount winter tires or tire chains, reduce speed, and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 431

Maximizes controllability through powertrain settings.

The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.

SNOW Mode

Next Start-up Mode

Last Mode Next Mode

NORMAL NORMAL

ECON ECON

SNOW NORMAL

432

uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System

D rivin

g

1Hill Descent Control System

The brake lights automatically come on while the system is in operation.

The system may not operate when driving down a gentle slope. Check the Hill Descent Control System indicator to see if the system is in operation.

The system may activate even when not driving downhill, such as when the vehicle leans while driving over uneven surfaces.

3WARNING Hill descent control cannot maintain a constant vehicle speed in every situation.

When driving down a very steep hill or on slippery road surfaces, the vehicle may not be able to maintain the vehicle speed and could cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Since Hill Descent Control is not designed to increase the limits of vehicle performance, the driver must always be aware of road surface conditions and drive safely.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 432

Hill Descent Control System When driving down hills where engine braking is not enough to decelerate the vehicle, this system helps maintain a constant vehicle speed without needing to depress the brake pedal.

The system operates under the following conditions. Driving at a speed between about 2-12 mph (3-20 km/h). Driving downhill. Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not depressed.

The systems operating status Green: Activated White: Standby Vehicle speed display White: Set speed Grey: Current speed u Blinks when the vehicle speed is above

the operating speed.

Hill Descent Control Operating Conditions

Driver Information Interface Display

Systems Operating Status

Vehicle Speed Display Current Speed

Operating Range of Set Speed

uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System D

rivin g

1How to Operate Hill Descent Control

Using the system repeatedly for a long time may cause the brakes to heat up and make the system go into standby mode temporarily.

Hill Descent Control is turned off every time you turn the power system off, even if it was turned on the last time you drove the vehicle.

The pedals may vibrate or you may hear the system working when in operation.

1To turn the system off

When the vehicle speed is 37 mph (60 km/h) or more, the system turns off automatically.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 433

To turn the system on When the vehicle speed is less than about 12 mph (20 km/h), press the button to turn the system on. u The system goes into standby mode, and

the Hill Descent Control System indicator (white) comes on.

When all the working conditions are met, the system activates, and the vehicle begins to maintain the vehicle speed when driving downhill. u The Hill Descent Control System indicator

(green) comes on when operating.

To adjust the set speed Depress the accelerator pedal or brake pedal to adjust the vehicle speed within the operating range. The vehicle speed at which you release the accelerator pedal or brake pedal will be the set speed.

To turn the system off Press the button to turn the system off.

How to Operate Hill Descent Control

Hill Descent Control System Indicator

(Hill Descent Control) Button

434

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

D rivin

g

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

The VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS*, parking brake and brake system and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 434

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

VSA Operation

VSA System Indicator

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

rivin g

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 435

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.

To restore VSA functionality/features, press the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

VSA On and Off

VSA OFF Indicator

436

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

D rivin

g

1Agile Handling Assist

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 436

Agile Handling Assist Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicles stability and performance during cornering.

uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM* D

rivin g

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*

NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.

The AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 588

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 437

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*

Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.

You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.

If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

437* Not available on all models

438

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

D rivin

g

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather. Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer

weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the

steering wheel. You drive on snowy or slippery roads. Tire chains are used.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: A compact spare tire is used. There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than

the condition at calibration. Tire chains are used.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 438

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear on the gauge.

U.S. models only

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

rivin g

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS*, parking brake and brake system and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1TPMS Calibration

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed. The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30- 60 mph (48-97 km/h). During this period, if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 439

You must start TPMS calibration every time you: Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. Rotate the tires. Replace one or more tires.

Before calibrating the TPMS: Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

2 Checking Tires P. 581

Make sure: The vehicle is at a complete stop. The transmission is in (P . The power mode is in ON.

TPMS Calibration

Continued 439* Not available on all models

440

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 440

When you calibrate the TPMS, do the following.

2 Settings* P. 123

1. Press the (home) button, to select Settings, then press the left selector wheel. u Vehicle settings appears on the display.

2. Roll the left selector wheel. u TPMS calibration appears on the

display.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 441

3. Press the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.

4. Roll the left selector wheel and select Calibrate, then press the left selector wheel. u Calibration started screen appears,

then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration failed to start message appears, repeat step 4.

The calibration process finishes automatically.

442

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 442

When you calibrate the TPMS, do the following.

2 Customized Features P. 345

1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the button. 3. Select Vehicle Settings. 4. Select TPMS Calibration. 5. Select Calibrate or Cancel.

If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat step 5.

The calibration process finishes automatically.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — Required Federal Explanation D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 443

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

444

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — Required Federal Explanation

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 444

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System* D

rivin g

1Blind Spot Information System*

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the Blind Spot Information System has limitations. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on the Blind Spot Information System may result in a collision.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the following situations: The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors

is strongly impacted. The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in

the alert zone should have been detected. The rear bumper or any system components need

to be repaired.

If the rear bumper or any system components are repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1 and 2.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 445

Blind Spot Information System*

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.

The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h) or above.

Alert zone range A: Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side. B: Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper. C: Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)

The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).

How the System works

Radar Sensors: underneath the rear bumper corners

: Alert zone 1

A

B C

: Alert zone 2

445Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*

446

D rivin

g

1Blind Spot Information System*

For proper Blind Spot Information System operation: Always keep the rear bumper and area around the

radar sensors clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with

labels or stickers of any kind.

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur: The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator

does not come on and the message Blind spot information system not available appears on the driver information interface.

The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator may come on even with the message displayed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 446

When the system detects a vehicle Blind Spot Information System alert indicator: Located on the outside rearview mirror on both sides.

Comes on when: A vehicle approaches you from behind to

overtake you at a speed difference of no more than about 31 mph (50 km/h).

You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).

Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in the direction of the detected vehicle while the Blind Spot Information System alert indicator is on. u The beeper sounds three times.

Comes On

Blinks

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System* D

rivin g

1Blind Spot Information System*

You can change the settings for the Blind Spot Information System.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 447

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface. 2 Switching the Display P. 107 2 Safety Support P. 118

The Blind Spot Information System will stay on the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

Blind Spot Information System On and Off

Continued 447* Not available on all models

448

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 448

The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the

adjacent lane. A vehicle is parked in a side lane. An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle. The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.

The Blind Spot Information System may not operate correctly under the following conditions: Making a turn at an intersection. Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected. An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert

zone. Driving on a curved road. A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane. The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another

vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby. The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud,

snow, ice, etc. The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or

deformed. In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog). Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle. An object such as a bicycle rack is attached to the rear of the vehicle.

Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 449

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

450

uuHonda Sensingu

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 450

Honda Sensing has the following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 453

Low Speed Braking Control* 2 P. 465

Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 511

Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 519

The functions which require switch operations to activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 471

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 491

Traffic Jam Assist* 2 P. 502

* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensingu D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 451

Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow. Or press to cancel the system.

LKAS Button Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist*. Or press to cancel these systems. CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Interval Button Press to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval.

RES/+/SET/ Switch Press the RES/+/SET/ switch up to set or resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or increase the vehicle speed. Press the RES/+/ SET/ switch down to set the ACC with Low Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.

Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist*

Interval Button

Button

LKAS Button

CANCEL Button

RES/+/SET/ Switch

451Continued* Not available on all models

452

uuHonda Sensingu

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 452

You can see the current state of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and Traffic Jam Assist*.

a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to be activated.

Green: The system is on. White: The system is standby. Amber: There is a problem with the system. b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist* is

ready to be activated. Green: The system is on. White: The system is standby. Amber: There is a problem with the system. c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist* is

activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected.

Green lines: The system is on. White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected. Amber line: Lane departure is detected. d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is

detected ahead. e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle speed. f Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow

shows the set vehicle interval.

Gauge Content

6

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 458

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 453

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

454

D rivin

g

1How the system works

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 458

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 454

How the system works

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving

bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.

Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of in frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle when you turn left at an intersection.

Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with:

— An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you. — A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.

A front wide view camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

When to use

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 455

The CMBSTM will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines there no longer is the potential for a collision. The CMBSTM may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.

When the system activates The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a

collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the systems earliest collision alert will come on.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

Visual Alerts

Beep

Audible Alert

455Continued* Not available on all models

456

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 456

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Collision Alert Stages

Distance between vehicles CMBSTM

The sensors detect a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking

Stage one

There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.

When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.

Stage two

The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly applied

Stage three

The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.

Forcefully applied

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

Normal ShortLong

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

You cannot turn the CMBSTM off while driving.

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay on under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 458

The CMBSTM is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, low tire pressure/ TPMS*, parking brake and brake system and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 457

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface. 2 Switching the Display P. 107 2 Safety Support P. 118

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

CMBSTM On and Off

Continued 457* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

458

D rivin

g

1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 458

The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road

surfaces. Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles may not be illuminated).

Roadway conditions Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads. There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.). Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 459

Vehicle conditions The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. Tire chains are installed. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The suspension has been modified.

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

460

D rivin

g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified size, type and brand, and that they are evenly worn. If you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or degree of wear, the system may not work properly.

Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of the vehicle may prevent the system from working properly.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 460

Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the camera due to the condition of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.

The vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle suddenly cuts in front of or jumps out in front of you.

The bicycle is stopped. The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways. When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle

blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing them. When several pedestrians or bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group. When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly. A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction. The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side

or not lit on either side in a dark place. When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by load. When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they

are running. When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about

6.6 feet (2 meters) in height. When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 461

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation When the vehicle ahead of you is a small motorcycle, motorcycle with a sidecar,

wheelchair, or other specially shaped vehicle. When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not

carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle. When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle

is not in front of the vehicle. The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you,

oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is significantly large. When the vehicle or moving bicycle in front of you slows suddenly. When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision. When you approach the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrians or

moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating the steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection etc.)*1

When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.

When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle.

When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.

*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left, the CMBSTM is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering wheel.

462

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 462

Automatic shutoff The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on when: You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an

extended period. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Driving with the parking brake applied. The camera temperature gets too high. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.). Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 463

Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBSTM may activate under the following conditions: Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right

turn. Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to

pass. Your vehicle approaches another vehicle at an intersection, etc.

With Little Chance of a Collision

464

uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 464

When passing through a low or narrow gate at a speed well over the speed limit. When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails are beside the road

along a curve.

When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

1Low Speed Braking Control*

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.

3WARNING The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may not reduce damage in each situation where the accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively pressed. Overreliance on the system may result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains responsible for safely operating the vehicle.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 465

Low Speed Braking Control*

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this system can detect if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/or assistive driving power suppression.

465Continued* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control*

466

D rivin

g

1Low Speed Braking Control*

For directions on the proper handling of the sonar sensors, please refer to the following page.

2 Sonar Sensors* P. 527

The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or put the transmission into (P.

In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during vehicle maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so on, or when using a chassis dynamometer, free rollers for inspection or when washing the car in conveyor type car wash machine.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 466

Assistive braking Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance with braking.

How the System Works

Audible Alert

Beep Beep

The vehicle applies brake

Driver depresses brake pedal

Remove brake after maintaining stationary position

Stop

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 467

Assistive driving power suppression When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an obstacle such as a wall detected near the front of or back of the vehicle, if the accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with a visual and audible alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward or backwards movement by limiting the output of the engine, then assistive braking will activate when you get closer to the obstacle.

Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations. When moving forward: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in (P , (R , or (N . When reversing: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than (R .

Audible AlertBeep

Beep

Accidental depression of the accelerator/Limiting the output of the engine

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control*

468

D rivin

g

1System On and Off

The system may temporarily turn off after reconnecting the battery. The system will automatically turn ON after the vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h) for some time. If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 468

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface. 2 Switching the Display P. 107 2 Safety Support P. 118

The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

System On and Off

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control* D

rivin g

1Conditions for Cancellation

After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not activate again for the same obstacle. They can be activated again after driving for a certain distance after last activation.

Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.) However, if assistive braking has been activated, in order to activate assistive driving power suppression again, it is necessary to drive for a certain distance to reset the system.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 469

Conditions for assistive driving power suppression. When the accelerator is no longer depressed. When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds. When the brake pedal is depressed.

Conditions for assistive braking cancellation. A certain amount of time has passed since activation.

The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:

Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,

sponges, etc. Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc. Short or small obstacles. Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper. Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road. Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.

Conditions for Cancellation

Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations

470

uuHonda SensinguLow Speed Braking Control*

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 470

Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.). The vehicle is too hot or cold. The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.

Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc. The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low. When going down a very steep slope. When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit

ultrasonic waves.

Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision When passing through short or narrow gates. When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps. When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position. When there are obstacles next to the road. When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc. When driving on flooded roads.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

3WARNING Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

3WARNING ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 471

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicles brake lights will illuminate.

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h). No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S .

When to use

A front wide view camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

472

D rivin

g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 479

When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.

3WARNING Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 472

How to activate the system

How to use

Press the button on the steering wheel.

(white) is on in the gauge ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions: On roads with frequent lane change or continuous

stop and go traffic, ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot keep an appropriate distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.

On roads with sharp turns. On roads with toll collection facilities or other

objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.

On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.), ACC with Low Speed Follow may not detect the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you properly.

On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control on the condition.

On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes. On roads with undulating slopes.

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS*, parking brake and brake system and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 473

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins. When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

To Set the Vehicle Speed

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins

Up or down

RES/+/SET/ Switch

(green)

Continued 473* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

474

D rivin

g

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 474

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the gauge.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Set Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Interval

(green)

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1When in Operation

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 475

There is a vehicle ahead ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicles set speed in order to keep the vehicles set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 484

When in Operation

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

476

D rivin

g

1When in Operation

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the

same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster

than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can be selected.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 479

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 476

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1When in Operation

ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily control the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g. curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g. operating the steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).

When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain the set following-interval for a short time.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 477

There is no vehicle ahead Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

On steep downhill during ACC with Low Speed Follow, it brakes to inhibit excessive acceleration for maintaining the set speed. However, the vehicle speed may become faster than the set speed.

When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

A vehicle icon with line contour appears on the gauge.

478

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 478

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the gauge. When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the gauge blinks. If you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate again within the prior set speed.

(green)

(green)

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 479

The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed Follow functions.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces. Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

the whole vehicle may not be illuminated). Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

480

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 480

Roadway conditions Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.

Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.). Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface. Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Vehicle conditions The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. Tire chains are installed. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The suspension has been modified.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 481

Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect the vehicle ahead of you

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the

system from recognizing it. The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either

side in a dark place.

482

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 482

Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large. When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly. When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially-shaped vehicle. When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not

carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane. When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle. When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.

When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.

Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then press down and release the RES/+/SET/ switch, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 483

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/ switch on the steering wheel.

Each time you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

If you keep the RES/+/SET/ switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To increase speed

To decrease speed

484

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 484

Press the Interval button to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval. Each time you press the button, the following- interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest, far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following- interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.

To Set or Change Following-interval

Interval Button

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 485

The higher your vehicles following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.

Following-interval When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

Nearest 82.7 feet

25.2 meters 1.1 sec

107.1 feet 32.6 meters

1.1 sec

Mid 113.4 feet

34.6 meters 1.6 sec

147.2 feet 44.9 meters

1.6 sec

Far 144.2 feet

44.0 meters 2.0 sec

187.3 feet 57.1 meters

2.0 sec

Furthest 175.9 feet

53.6 meters 2.4 sec

229.6 feet 70.0 meters

2.4 sec

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

486

D rivin

g

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/ switch up even if the vehicle is stopped. When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray. When pressing the RES/+/SET/ switch up, the ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed speed. If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 486

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. u The indicator (green) on the gauge

changes to the indicator (white). Press the button. u indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward. u The indicator (green) on the gauge

changes to the indicator (white).

To Cancel

CANCEL Button

Button

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1To Cancel

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the

button. Press the button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

(white)

Prior Set Speed (gray)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 487

Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel: Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. Abrupt steering wheel movement. When the ABS, VSA, CMBSTM, or Low Speed Braking Control* is activated. When the VSA system indicator comes on. When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope. When you manually apply the parking brake. Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too

close to your vehicle. When accelerating rapidly. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel. When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on. The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for

example, you are descending a long slope). When the system doesn’t detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain

amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.

The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied. The drivers seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes. The engine is turned off.

Continued 487* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

488

D rivin

g

1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control in the following situations: When the vehicle speed is set. When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 488

Press and hold the Interval button for one second. Cruise mode selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. The indicator comes on. Green: The system is on. White: The system is standby. To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the Interval button again for one second.

When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the RES/+/SET/ switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

ACC with Low Speed Follow ON

Cruise Control ON

Interval Button

(white) (white)

To Set the Vehicle Speed

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow D

rivin g

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/ switch up while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray. When pressing the RES/+/SET/ switch up, the cruise control is activated with displayed speed. If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 489

Each time you press the RES/+/SET/ switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

If you keep the RES/+/SET/ switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

Press the button. u The indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal. u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To Cancel

uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

490

D rivin

g

1To Cancel

You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) When cruise control is canceled by pressing the

button.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 490

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 498

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 491

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

Front Wide View Camera Monitors the lane lines

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

492

D rivin

g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 492

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

Lane Keep Support Function

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 493

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Lane Departure Warning Function

LKAS indicator (green)

Amber line

Warning Area

Warning Area

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

494

D rivin

g

1When the System can be Used

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Be sure to keep the following below to activate the system properly; Always keep the windshield around the camera

clean. When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to

apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens. Do not touch the camera lens. Do not attach a sticker to the area around the

camera.

If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be used, LKAS is on without standby.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 494

The system can be used when the following conditions are met. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed.

How to activate the system 1. Press the LKAS button. u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the

gauge. The system is standby.

u If traffic lane lines are detected, white lines appear on the gauge.

When the System can be Used

White lines

LKAS indicator (white)

LKAS Button

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 495

2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The LKAS indicator changes from white

to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

Press the LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

LKAS indicator (green)

Green lines

To Cancel

LKAS Button

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

496

D rivin

g

1To Cancel

You can change the setting for the LKAS. LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 496

The system operation is suspended if you:

Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about

45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.

Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.

When the LKAS is suspended, green lines on the gauge change to white lines or disappear, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

LKAS indicator (white)

White lines

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 497

The LKAS may be automatically suspended when: The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is turned quickly. You fail to steer the vehicle. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 94 mph (150 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when: In the following cases, traffic lane lines may disappear on the gauge, the beeper may sound, and the LKAS may automatically be canceled: The camera temperature gets extremely high. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty. The ABS or VSA system engages.

498

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 498

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines. Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated). The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and

lane lines and the road surface are not visible. Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

LKAS Conditions and Limitations

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 499

Roadway conditions Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings.

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.

The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

500

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 500

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.

Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. Driving on roads with double lane lines. Driving on snowy or slippery roads. The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills. Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or interchange

uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 501

Vehicle conditions When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. The suspension has been modified. Tire chains are installed.

502

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist*

D rivin

g

1Traffic Jam Assist*

Important Safety Reminders Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under certain conditions:

2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations P. 507

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 502

Traffic Jam Assist*

The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.

How Traffic Jam Assist works When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the Traffic Jam Assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.

When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the center of the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines. When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is temporarily canceled. The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.

Front Wide View Camera

Detects left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist* D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 503

When the vehicle enters the warning area, Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with an audible alert as well as a warning display.

Lane Departure Warning Function

LKAS indicator (green)

Amber line

Warning Area

Warning Area

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist*

504

D rivin

g

1Traffic Jam Assist Activation

Refer to the following page for proper handling of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS):

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491

Refer to the following page for steering buttons and displays:

2 Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist* P. 451

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 504

Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist: LKAS is activated. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45 mph (0 and 72 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The driver is gripping the steering wheel. The shift position is in (D , (S or (L.

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations: You are traveling on a road with sharp curves. u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for

the road conditions. You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area. You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow. u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.

Traffic Jam Assist Activation

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist* D

rivin g

1How Traffic Jam Assist Works

If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

In some cases the system cannot properly detect the traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide steering assistance.

2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations P. 507

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel or does not adequately maintain control of steering, the warning below will appear.

If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 505

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The LKAS indicator changes from white

to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

How Traffic Jam Assist Works

Green lines

LKAS indicator (green)

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist*

506

D rivin

g

1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:

You are traveling over 45 mph (72 km/h). uWhen the speed of the vehicle reaches 45 mph

(72 km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is deactivated and LKAS is activated instead. Once the speed of the vehicle drops to under 40 mph (64 km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is reactivated.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 506

Press the LKAS button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when: The system is automatically temporarily canceled under the following circumstances. The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is turned sharply. You fail to steer the vehicle. You are driving through a sharp curve. The brake pedal is depressed. Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when: The traffic lane lines will disappear from the screen, the beeper may sound, and Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled under the following circumstances: The temperature of the camera is too high. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, is dirty.

Canceling Traffic Jam Assist

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist* D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 507

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines. Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated). When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to

the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection. Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations

508

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist*

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 508

Roadway conditions Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings.

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.

The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist* D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 509

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.

Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. Driving on roads with double lane lines. Driving on snowy or slippery roads. The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills. Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or interchange

510

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Jam Assist*

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 510

Vehicle conditions When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. The suspension has been modified. Tire chains are installed.

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System D

rivin g

1Road Departure Mitigation System

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure Mitigation system has limitations. Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you when the system detects that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into another lane without using a turn signal. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect all lane markings or every instance of lane drift. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or an oncoming vehicle. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be able to assist you depending on weather, speed or road conditions.

The Road Departure Mitigation system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations P. 515

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 511

Road Departure Mitigation System Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

The front wide view camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings in white or yellow, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles. If your vehicle approaches any detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles when the turn signals have not been engaged, the system activates. u If the system cannot detect lane markings

(in white or yellow), no assistance will be provided to avoid approaching oncoming vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the system assists with steering and alerts you with rapid steering wheel vibrations to help you remain within the detected lane. 2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

As a visual alert, the Lane departure message appears on the driver information interface.

How the System Works

Amber line

511Continued* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System

512

D rivin

g

1Road Departure Mitigation System

There are times when you may not notice the Road Departure Mitigation system functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

You can change the settings for the Road Departure Mitigation system. If LKAS is off, the message below may appear if the system has determined that there is a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (into a grass or gravel border) or oncoming vehicle.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 512

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System D

rivin g

1How the System Activates

The Road Departure Mitigation system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.

2 Indicators P. 86

The Road Departure Mitigation system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of

a lane. Driven in a narrow lane.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 513

The system activates when all of the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,

braking, or steering.

How the System Activates

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System

514

D rivin

g

1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

When you have selected Warning only from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the system does not operate the steering wheel.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS*, parking brake and brake system and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 514

You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface. 2 Switching the Display P. 107 2 Safety Support P. 118

The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 515

The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are

parallel to white (or yellow) lines. Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated). The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and

lane lines and the road surface are not visible. The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass

or gravel.

Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations

516

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 516

Roadway conditions Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk. The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

(or yellow) lines. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. Driving on roads with double lane lines. Driving on snowy or slippery roads. Passing through an exit or an interchange. The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as

curves, twists, or hills.

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 517

Vehicle conditions When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. Tire chains are installed. The suspension has been modified.

Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming vehicles

The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways. The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you. When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the

system from recognizing it. The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side

in a dark place. The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short. Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you. There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes. The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.

518

uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation System

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 518

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped. When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.

With Little Chance of a Collision The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions. When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming

vehicle is right in front of you.

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all situations. Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the road conditions.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

The traffic sign recognition system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525

You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on and off.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 519

Traffic Sign Recognition System Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined time and distance. If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will not be displayed.

The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when: The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected. You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.

How the System Works

519Continued* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

520

D rivin

g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

If your vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit, an icon representing the speed limit sign for the current area will blink in the display.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Customized Features P. 345

The systems ability to accurately notify the driver of the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In some cases, the system may display false warnings or other inaccurate information.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations P. 521

The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from country to country. Just after entering a country whose unit differs to the one of the country from which you came, Traffic Sign Recognition System may not work correctly.

2 Settings* P. 123 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122 2 Customized Features P. 345

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 520

* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 521

The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the following cases.

Environmental conditions Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.

Roadway conditions Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Vehicle conditions When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor

visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,

accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats. The suspension has been modified. Tire chains are installed. Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

522

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 522

The position or the condition of the traffic sign The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find. The sign is located far away from your vehicle. The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach. The sign is on a corner or bend in the road. The sign is faded or bent. The sign is rotated or damaged signs. The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost. Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other

object. Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden

in shadow. The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs). Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).

Other conditions When you are driving at a high speed.

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 523

The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at all in the following cases. u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed

limit. There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,

vehicle type, school zone, etc. Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are

blurred, etc.). The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for

the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between the side road and the main road.

There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).

524

uuHonda SensinguTraffic Sign Recognition System

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 524

The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.

Signs Displayed on the Gauge

Speed Limit Sign

uuHonda SensinguFront Wide View Camera D

rivin g

1Front Wide View Camera

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 525

Front Wide View Camera The camera, used in systems such as Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Traffic Sign Recognition system, CMBSTM, and Traffic Jam Assist*, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

Camera Location and Handling Tips

Front Wide View Camera

525Continued* Not available on all models

uuHonda SensinguFront Wide View Camera

526

D rivin

g

1Front Wide View Camera

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.

Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor viewing condition. message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the

windshield is clean. Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message does not disappear after driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 526

uuHonda SensinguSonar Sensors* D

rivin g

1Sonar Sensors*

For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not: Place stickers or other objects on or around the

sensors. Hit the area around the sensors. Attempt to take apart any sensor. Put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Consult with a dealer if: A sensor has been subjected to shock. Work needs to be done to the area around a

sensor.

In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. The front or rear bumper has made contact with a

hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc. The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear

collision. The vehicle has been driven through a deep

puddle.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 527

Sonar Sensors*

Location and range of sensors The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille.

Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors

Sensor Range

527* Not available on all models

528

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 528

1Brake System

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is because the brake system is in operation, and it is normal.

1Parking Brake

You may hear the electric parking brake system operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617

If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

To apply The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely. u The indicator in the switch comes on. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on. To release The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the electric parking brake switch. u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

Parking Brake

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Electric Parking Brake Switch

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Parking Brake

In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates. When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes

while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated. When the drivers seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

When the power system is turned off while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.

When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

When the drivers seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system is applied.

When the engine is turned off while the brake hold is applied.

When there is a problem with the Brake Hold System while brake hold is applied.

If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on: Malfunction indicator lamp Transmission system indicator

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 529

Automatic parking brake feature operation If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated: The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to

VEHICLE OFF. To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake

system indicator (red) is on. 2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 530

To release automatically Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake. Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal. When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release. u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

You can release the parking brake automatically when: You are wearing the drivers seat belt. The engine is running. The transmission is not in (P or (N.

Accelerator Pedal

uuBrakinguBrake System

530

D rivin

g

1Parking Brake

The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on: Parking brake and brake system indicator VSA system indicator ABS indicator Supplemental restraint system indicator The parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving with the electric parking brake switch being pulled.

In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied. When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated. Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor- type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 530

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake

switch. u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.

3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.

4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch. u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated. u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will

remain applied after you turn off the engine. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and

brake system indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below. 1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the

electric parking brake switch. u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower speed position.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBSTM or another system that automatically controls braking, the brake pedal is depressed and released in accordance with braking function.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 531

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

2 Brake Assist System P. 536 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 535

Foot Brake

uuBrakinguBrake System

532

D rivin

g

1Automatic Brake Hold

3WARNING Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

3WARNING Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 532

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

Turning on the system Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button. u The automatic brake hold system

indicator comes on. The system is turned on.

The system is in the previously selected on or off setting each time you fasten the drivers seat belt and start the engine.

Activating the system Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must not be in (P or (R. u The automatic brake hold indicator

comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.

u Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

Automatic Brake Hold

Comes On

Automatic Brake Hold Button

On

Brake Pedal Comes On

Comes On

U.S.

Canada

uuBrakinguBrake System D

rivin g

1Automatic Brake Hold

While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

2 When Stopped P. 537

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

3WARNING When using the automatic brake hold, keep your foot on the brake pedal until the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

If the vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Release your foot from the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 533

Canceling the system Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in a position other than (P or (N. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move. u The automatic brake hold indicator goes

off. The system continues to be on.

The system automatically cancels when: You engage the parking brake. You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into (P or (R.

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes. The drivers seat belt is unfastened. The engine is turned off. There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

On

Accelerator Pedal

Goes Off

uuBrakinguBrake System

534

D rivin

g

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

If you turn off the engine or unfasten the drivers seat belt while the automatic brake hold system is on, the automatic brake hold system will automatically turn off. In this case, when the drivers seat belt is fastened and the engine is restarted, the automatic brake hold system will turn on without needing to press the automatic brake hold button.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 534

Turning off the automatic brake hold system Only the automatic brake hold system indicator comes on: Press the automatic brake hold button. u The automatic brake hold system

indicator goes off.

When the automatic brake hold indicator comes on at the same time: Press the automatic brake hold button with

the brake pedal depressed. u The automatic brake hold system

indicator and the automatic brake hold indicator go off.

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Goes Off

Goes Off

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) D

rivin g

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS: You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,

such as gravel or snow. The tires are equipped with snow chains.

The following may be observed with the ABS system: Motor sounds coming from the engine

compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.

Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 535

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: Wet or snow covered roads. Roads paved with stone. Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

ABS

536

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 536

Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 537

D

rivin g

1When Stopped

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal. Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle

stops completely.

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

3WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,

but fully. 3. Change the shift position to (P. 4. Turn off the engine. u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30

seconds.

Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

538

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

D rivin

g

1Parking Sensor System*

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when: The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or

dirt. The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. There is something nearby that emits ultrasonic

waves or high frequency sounds. Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

The system may not detect these obstacles: Thin or low objects. Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,

or sponge. Objects directly under the bumper.

The system may falsely detect obstacles in the following situations: The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,

bumps, or a hill. When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or

other objects that emit ultrasonic waves. There is splashing water near the sensors due to

heavy rains, etc.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 538

Parking Sensor System*

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

The sensor location and range

Front Corner Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors

Front Center Sensors

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less Front: Within about 35 in (90 cm) or less Rear: Within about 40 in (100 cm) or less

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

1Parking Sensor System*

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 539

Parking sensor system on and off You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.

2 Switching the Display P. 107 2 Safety Support P. 118

The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in any position other than (P or (R , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Continued 539* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

540

D rivin

g

1Screen Operation

The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions: If the parking sensor system is turned off. If there is a malfunction in the system.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 540

Screen Operation You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.

Split Screen Tab

Split View Off

Split View On

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 541

When the distance between your vehicle and detected obstacles becomes shorter

*1:On the driver information interface *2:On the audio/information screen *3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles. To temporarily turn off the beeper, press the left selector wheel while it is sounding. Temporary OFF will be canceled when the shift position is switched or the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (14 km/h) or higher.

Interval between

beeps

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator

Driver information interface

Audio/Information Screen Corner Sensors Center Sensors

Moderate

Front: About 35-24 in (90-60 cm)

Rear: About 40-31 in (100-80 cm)

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Yellow*3

Short About 24-18 in (60-45 cm)

About 32-25 in (80-65 cm)

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Amber

Very short About 18-14 in (45-35 cm)

About 25-16 in (65-40 cm)

Continuous About 14 in (35 cm) or less

About 16 in (40 cm) or less

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Red

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

542

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

D rivin

g

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

The parking sensor systems alerting buzzer overrides the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors are detecting obstacles at the closest range.

3CAUTION Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 542

Cross Traffic Monitor*

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor* D

rivin g

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions: An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,

near your vehicles rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensors scope.

Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher.

A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25 km/h).

The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt.

When there is bad weather. Your vehicle is on an incline. Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 543

The system activates when: The power mode is in ON. The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 544

The transmission is in (R . Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or

lower.

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

How the System Works

Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners

Continued 543* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

544

D rivin

g

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 544

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.

The system can be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the Cross Traffic Monitor icon.

You can also switch the system on and off from the customized feature on the audio/ information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 337, 345

When the System Detects a Vehicle

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off

Wide ViewNormal View

Arrow Icon

Top Down View

Cross Traffic Monitor icon

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 545

D

rivin g

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

The rear camera view is displayed prior to the audio/ information screen.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

2 Customized Features P. 337, 345

Fixed Guideline ON: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. OFF: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not move.

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R.

You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display.

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Camera

Tailgate open range

546

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 546

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .

If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R.

If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .

If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into (R within 10 seconds after you took it out of (R, Top down view mode will be activated.

Bumper Bumper Bumper

Wide view mode Normal view mode Top down view mode

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 547

D

rivin g

1Fuel Information

NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Fuel Information Fuel recommendation

Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 14.0 US gal (53 L)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

548

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

D rivin

g

1How to Refuel

The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.

Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 548

How to Refuel Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.

2. Turn off the engine. 3. Unlock the drivers door. u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the

vehicle will unlock. 4. Press and release the area indicated by the

arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click and the lid will open slightly.

5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully open position.

Press

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel D

rivin g

1How to Refuel

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door. The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the drivers door.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pumps fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 637

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 549

6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler

nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will

click off automatically. u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always

add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

550

D rivin

g

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 550

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for fuel consumption testing in the search field at the top of the page.

Miles driven Gallons of fuel

Miles per Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.

2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 565

Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicles underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 551

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ………… 552 Safety When Performing Maintenance …. 553 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ……………………………………. 554

Maintenance MinderTM ………………… 555 Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood …. 563 Opening the Hood ……………………… 564 Recommended Engine Oil ……………. 565 Oil Check………………………………….. 566 Adding Engine Oil ………………………. 567

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter….. 568 Engine Coolant ………………………….. 570 Transmission Fluid………………………. 572 Brake Fluid………………………………… 573 Refilling Window Washer Fluid……… 574

Replacing Light Bulbs ………………….. 575 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades…. 577 Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires …………………………… 581 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 583 Tire Labeling ……………………………… 583 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 585 Wear Indicators………………………….. 587

Tire Service Life………………………….. 587 Tire and Wheel Replacement ……….. 588 Tire Rotation……………………………… 589 Winter Tires ………………………………. 590

Battery……………………………………….. 592 Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery ………. 594 Climate Control System Maintenance ..595 Cleaning

Interior Care ……………………………… 596 Exterior Care……………………………… 598

Accessories and Modifications …….. 601

552

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 552

Before Performing Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 559

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

2 Authorized Manuals P. 650

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Routine inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 28

Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2 Brake Fluid P. 573

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 575

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577

Types of Inspection and Maintenance

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M

ain ten

an ce

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owners manual.

3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 553

Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

Maintenance Safety

Vehicle Safety

554

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

M ain

ten an

ce

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

NOTICE Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 554

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 555

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

556

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 559

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 556

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine

oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

(home) Button

Engine Oil Life

Main Item Sub Item

Left Selector Wheel

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 557

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

When you select the Maintenance Minder screen, it displays codes for maintenance items due at the next engine oil change, along with the percentage of engine oil life remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Press the (home) button to switch to another display.

The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon.

558

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

Information

5 to 1

switch

The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.

service pears

odels) he y blinks. switch

The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 558

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation

Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is percent. Press the (home) button to to another display.

Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The engine oil life has passed its life, and a negative distance ap after driving over 10 miles (U.S. m or 10 km (Canadian models). T negative distance on the displa Press the (home) button to to another display.

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 559

Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder Message

System Message Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

560

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). us areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.

ission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance rly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed 40,000 km). der message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is

ake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires

lace air cleaner element*2

lace dust and pollen filter*3

ect drive belt lace transmission fluid*4

lace spark plugs ect valve clearance lace engine coolant lace rear differential fluid*

lace brake fluid*5

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 560

U.S. models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system#

Fuel lines and connections#

*2: If you drive in dusty *3: If you drive primarily

from diesel-powered *4: Driving in mountaino

This requires transm Minder. If you regula every 25,000 miles (

*5: If a Maintenance Min reset, change the br

CODE 1 Rota 2 Rep

Rep Insp

3 Rep 4 Rep

Insp 5 Rep 6 Rep 7 Rep

* Not available on all models

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2

ace dust and pollen filter*3

ect drive belt ace transmission fluid*4

ace spark plugs ect valve clearance ace engine coolant ace rear differential fluid*

ace brake fluid*5

ice front and rear brakes ect these items: ie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots uspension components riveshaft boots rake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) ll fluid levels and condition of fluids xhaust system#

uel lines and connections#

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 561

Canadian models

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.

This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

0 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl

Repl Insp

3 Repl 4 Repl

Insp 5 Repl 6 Repl 7 Repl 9 Serv

Insp T S D B A E F

561Continued* Not available on all models

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

562

M ain

ten an

ce

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 345

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 562

Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. 5. Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset

mode. 6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All

due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item. 8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.

Resetting the Display

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 563

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

BatteryWasher Fluid (Blue Cap)

564

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

M ain

ten an

ce

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

NOTICE Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

3WARNING The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 564

Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the

drivers side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

Hood Release Handle

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil M

ain ten

an ce

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 565

Recommended Engine Oil Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.

Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil

Honda Genuine Motor Oil API service SN or higher grade fuel-

efficient oil API Certification Mark Starburst

Ambient Temperature

0W-20

Ambient Temperature

566

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

M ain

ten an

ce

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 566

Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil M

ain ten

an ce

1Adding Engine Oil

NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 567

Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

568

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

M ain

ten an

ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 568

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engines lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.

3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and slotted head screws by turning 90 counter-clockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

Under Cover

Washer

Drain Bolt

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the Engine oil pressure low warning appears, turn off the engine, and check your work.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 569

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.

6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to

the filter gasket. 8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:

30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the

engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including

filter): 4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.

11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.

12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.

Oil Filter

570

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

M ain

ten an

ce

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31F (-35C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 570

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN

mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M

ain ten

an ce

1Radiator

NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 571

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter- clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

Radiator

Radiator Cap

572

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

M ain

ten an

ce

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 572

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid yourself.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid M

ain ten

an ce

1Brake Fluid

NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 573

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid

MIN

MAX

574

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

M ain

ten an

ce

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the window washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicles paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the window washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 574

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Window Washer Reservoir

U.S. models

Canadian models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 575

M

ain ten

an ce

1Headlights

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Headlights Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal/Parking, Daytime Running and Front Side Marker Lights Front turn signal/parking, daytime running and front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

575* Not available on all models

576

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and Rear Side Marker Lights

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 576

Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and Rear Side Marker Lights Brake lights, taillights, rear turn signal lights, and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Back-Up Lights and Taillights Back-up lights and taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Rear License Plate Light Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 577

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade

NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade 1. Set the power mode to ON, then to

VEHICLE OFF. 2. Within 10 seconds of setting the power

mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper switch in the MIST position for more than two seconds. u Both wiper arms are set to the

maintenance position as shown in the image.

3. Lift both wiper arms.

578

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 578

4. Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper blade off the wiper arm.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

6. Lower both wiper arms. 7. Set the power mode to ON, then set the

wiper switch to the MIST position once. u The wiper arms return to the standard

position. Tab

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the rear window.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 579

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Raise the wiper arm off. 2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade

until it comes off from the wiper arm.

3. Slide the wiper blade out of the end with the indent.

Wiper Arm

Wiper Blade

580

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 580

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm.

Retainers

Holder

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 581

Checking and Maintaining Tires

M

ain ten

an ce

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuChecking Tires

582

M ain

ten an

ce

1Checking Tires

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 439

U.S. models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 582

Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.

2 Wear Indicators P. 587

Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P215/55R17 94V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 215: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 583

Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Label Example

Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

584

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturers identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year Week

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 584

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Glossary of Tire Terminology

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M

ain ten

an ce

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 585

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

586

M ain

ten an

ce

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 586

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Traction

Temperature

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators M

ain ten

an ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 587

Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear Indicator mark

588

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 588

Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 439

Front

Direction Mark

U.S. models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 589

Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

590

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

M ain

ten an

ce

1Winter Tires

NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturers instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 590

Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires M

ain ten

an ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 591

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

Follow the chain manufacturers instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.

Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain STD SC1038

Not recommended to use any type of chain or cable

Models with 215/60R17 tires

Models with 225/55R18 tires

592

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 592

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information.

3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.

2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 214

The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 134

The immobilizer system needs to be reset.

2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 97

Canadian models only

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery M

ain ten

an ce

1Battery

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, brake system (amber), safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/ h). Each indicator should go off. If any does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 593

Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.

593* Not available on all models

594

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 594

1Replacing the Remote Battery

NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

3WARNING CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

Replacing the Remote Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the slot with key grip. u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent

scratching the keyless remote. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

3. Remove the battery by prying on the edge with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratching the keyless remote.

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 595

Climate Control System Maintenance

M

ain ten

an ce

1Climate Control System Maintenance

NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicles air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 84 2 Specifications P. 640

Canadian models

Caution

Flammable Refrigerant

Requires Registered Technician to Service

Air Conditioning System

:

:

:

:

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

596

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 596

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Cleaning Seat Belts

Opening

uuCleaninguInterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of the front wide view camera.

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position any rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather*

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 597

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

The drivers floor mat hooks over the floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%

water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

Cleaning the Window

Floor Mats

Lock

Unlock

Maintaining Genuine Leather*

597* Not available on all models

598

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Lock the doors when washing the vehicle. Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A high-pressure spray may cause it to open.

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.

2 Changing the Front Wiper Blade P. 577

Air Intake Vents

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 598

Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. Fold in the door mirrors.

Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,

use low pressure water and a mild detergent. Do not spray water directly onto the camera or the area around it. Water may

enter the lens and cause the camera to malfunction.

Washing the Vehicle

Using an Automated Car Wash

Using High Pressure Cleaners

uuCleaninguExterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Applying Wax

NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 599

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

Applying Wax

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Cleaning the Window

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

600

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 600

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 601

Accessories and Modifications

M

ain ten

an ce

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or

backs of the front seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

2 Fuses P. 628

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

602

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

M ain

ten an

ce

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 602

Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicles electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 603

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Types of Tools ……………………………. 604

If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ……………………. 605

Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine…………………… 612 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak ……… 614 Emergency Engine Start ………………. 615 Emergency Engine Stop ………………. 616

If the Battery Is Dead ………………….. 617 Shift Lever Does Not Move ………….. 619 Overheating

How to Handle Overheating…………. 620

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears …. 622 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On…623 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks …………………………….. 623

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks …………………………….. 624

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ………………….. 625

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On ..626

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ………………….. 627

Fuses Fuse Locations …………………………… 628 Inspecting and Changing Fuses…….. 632

Emergency Towing……………………… 634 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door… 635 If You Cannot Open the Tailgate …. 636 Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container … 637

604

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 604

1Types of Tools

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Types of Tools

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

Funnel

Tool Case

Jack

Jack

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 605

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Changing a Flat Tire

Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Put the transmission into (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

606

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Changing a Flat Tire

NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesnt work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 606

1. Fold the cargo area floor lid into three parts.

2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area. Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar and jack out of the tool case.

3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Floor Lid

Tool Case

Jack Spare Tire

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 607

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

Wheel Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

608

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 608

1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

How to Set Up the Jack

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 609

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the

lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)

Replacing the Flat Tire

Wheel Nut

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

610

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Storing the Flat Tire

3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 610

1. Remove the center cap.

2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.

4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar and jack back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area under the cargo floor lid.

Storing the Flat Tire

Center Cap

For full-size tire

For compact spare tire

Wing Bolt

Spacer Cone

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 611

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire pressure monitor system problem will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 439

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire

U.S. models

612

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 612

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617

Depending on the situation, it may be possible to temporarily start the engine using the emergency start procedure.

2 Emergency Engine Start P. 615

Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.

uuEngine Does Not StartuChecking the Engine H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

cklist on interface. lem side of remote message appears.

614

a dealer.

again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 418

g, the engine cannot be started.

Gauge P. 104

a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 613

Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Check for a message on the driver informati If the To start, touch start button with emb

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P.

Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 632

Check the battery. Have the battery checked by a dealer.

2 Battery P. 592

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin

2 Immobilizer System P. 156

Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel

Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 632

If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 634

614

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 614

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/ STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start, start the engine as follows:

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the keyless remote while the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the keyless remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button

flashes for about 30 seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds while the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Start H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Emergency Engine Start

Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

2 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 619

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 615

Emergency Engine Start If the engine does not start using the normal engine starting procedure, you may be able to start it using the emergency start procedure below. Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency. 1. Check that the parking brake is engaged. 2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then set the power mode to ACCESSORY. 3. Firmly depress the brake pedal and hold down the ENGINE START/STOP button

for at least 15 seconds.

This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to start the engine using the above procedure. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

616

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Emergency Engine Stop

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 616

Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 617

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Jump Starting Procedure

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Jump Starting Procedure Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal. 2. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicles battery + terminal. 3. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using the automotive battery

charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15- volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

4. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery — terminal.

5. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.

6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicles engine and increase its rpm slightly.

7. Attempt to start your vehicles engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

Booster Battery

uu If the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

618

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Jump Starting Procedure

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, brake system (amber), safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the driver information interface when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/ h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 618

Once your vehicles engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles stud bolt. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery —

terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

What to Do After the Engine Starts

* Not available on all models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 619

Shift Lever Does Not Move

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

1. Set the parking brake. 2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 3. Remove the built-in key from the keyless

remote. 4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key in, press the shift

lever release button, and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Releasing the Lock

Release Button

Shift Lock Release Slot

620

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 620

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE Continuing to drive with Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. appears

on the driver information interface. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood.

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 621

Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. on the driver information interface disappears. u If the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the driver information interface. If Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

622

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 622

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

1If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears

NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the warning

appears 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level

ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights

on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three

minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.

2 Oil Check P. 566

3. Start the engine and check the Engine oil pressure low warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving

again. u The warning does not disappear within

10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Charging System Indicator Comes On H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 623

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

624

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 626

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 624

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. Reasons for the indicator to blink There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. What to do when the indicator blinks Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a

dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 625

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface, immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.

626

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 626

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically 2 Parking Brake P. 528

If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately. u Preventing the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into (P .

If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

uu Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 627

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

U.S. models

628

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 628

Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Fuse Box

Tab

uuFusesuFuse Locations H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 629

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps 1 BATTERY 125 A

2

— 40 A — 40 A

F/BOX OPTION 60 A — 40 A

F/BOX OPTION2 40 A — (30 A)

F/BOX MAIN 60 A

3

— 30 A — 30 A — 70 A

RR DEFROSTER 30 A — (40 A) — 30 A

HTR MTR 40 A

4

— 30 A ABS/VSA MTR 40 A

— (30 A) — 30 A

IG MAIN 30 A — 30 A

IG MAIN2 30 A

* Not available on all models

5

ST MAGNETIC SW 30 A WIPER 30 A

EPS 70 A — 30 A

ABS/VSA FSR 40 A MAIN FAN 30 A

F/BOX MAIN2 40 A 6 SUB FAN 30 A 7 BOOSTER MTR 40 A 8 — (30 A) 9 — (20 A)

10 AUDIO SUB* (7.5 A) 11 FR DEICER* (15 A) 12 — — 13 H/STRG* (10 A) 14 — (10 A) 15 — (15 A) 16 MG CLUTCH 10 A 17 WASHER 15 A 18 HORN 10 A 19 BACK UP 15 A 20 AUDIO (15 A) 21 R/M1 20 A 22 DBW 15 A 23 R/M2 20 A 24 BACKUP FI-ECU 10 A 25 IGP 15 A

Circuit Protected Amps

26 TCU 15 A 27 LCM L 20 A 28 — (20 A) 29 STOP 10 A 30 LCM R 20 A 31 IG COIL 15 A 32 — — 33 HAZARD 15 A 34 — — 35 — — 36 — — 37 — (30 A) 38 — — 39 — — 40 — (7.5 A) 41 IGPS [LAF] 10 A 42 IG1 MON2 10 A

Circuit Protected Amps

630

uuFusesuFuse Locations

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 630

Located under the dashboard. Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Box

Fuse Label

uuFusesuFuse Locations H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 631

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps 1 P/W DR 20 A 2 P/W AS 20 A 3 P/W RR R 20 A 4 P/W RR L 20 A 5 OPTION 10 A 6 SRS 10 A 7 T/G MTR (10 A) 8 — — 9 — 20 A

10 DOOR LOCK 20 A 11 METER 10 A 12 ST CUT RLY 10 A 13 OPTION2 10 A 14 OPTION6 (VB SOL) 10 A 15 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A) 16 SUNROOF* (20 A) 17 — — 18 — — 19 — — 20 — 10 A 21 CARGO ACC SOCKET 20 A 22 SMART 10 A 23 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A) 24 — — 25 IMG 10 A

* Not available on all models

26 SRS 10 A 27 ACG 10 A 28 ABS/VSA 10 A 29 FUEL PUMP 20 A 30 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 31 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 32 — — 33 USB CHG 10 A 34 — — 35 — — 36 — — 37 E-PT L 20 A 38 — — 39 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A 40 P SEAT REC / RR HI* (20 A) 41 P SEAT SLIDE / FR HI* (20 A) 42 — — 43 A/C 10 A 44 DRL 10 A 45 ACC 10 A 46 ACC KEY LOCK 10 A 47 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A 48 H/SEAT* 20 A 49 — — 50 — — 51 — — 52 E-DPS* (20 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

53 — — 54 OPTION1 / FUEL LID 10 A 55 — — 56 — —

Circuit Protected Amps

632

uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

2 Fuse Locations P. 628

Replace a fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 632

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the main fuse in the engine

compartment fuse box. u Look at the fuse through the hole. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

Hole

Main Fuse

uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 633

4. Check the combined fuses in the engine compartment fuse box. u Look into the space between the fuses. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

634

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 634

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.

NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flatbed equipment.

2 Parking Brake P. 528

2WD models

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flatbed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

All models

2WD models

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 635

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

1. Open the tailgate. 2. Push on the corner of the cover, then

remove the cover.

3. Pull the release cord as shown. u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door

when it is pulled. 4. Open the fuel fill door.

2 How to Refuel P. 548

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

Cover

Release Cord

636

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 636

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

Follow Up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the back of the tailgate. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while sliding the lever to the right with the flat-tip screwdriver.

What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

Cover

Lever

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 637

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.

Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to

make it pop up slightly. u The fuel fill door opens.

3. Take the funnel out of the cargo area. 2 Types of Tools P. 604

4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe. 5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it. 7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Funnel

638

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 638

lank.

This page intentionally left b

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 639

Information

This chapter includes your vehicles specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications ……………………………… 640 Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ………………………………….. 642

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ……. 643 Reporting Safety Defects …………….. 644

Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes………….. 645

Warranty Coverages …………………… 647 Authorized Manuals……………………. 650 Customer Service Information……… 651 Open Source License

Meter Open Source License …………. 652

640

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 640

Vehicle Specifications

Air Conditioning

Model HR-V No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the drivers doorjamb

Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Charge Quantity 15.3 17.1 oz (435 485 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL14 (POE) Quantity 6.41 7.32 cu-in (105 120 cm3)

* Not available on all models

Engine Specifications

Fuel

Washer Fluid

Displacement 121.8 cu-in (1,996 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK

DILKAR7H11GS DILKAR7G11GS

DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S

Fuel: Type

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14.0 US gal (53 L)

Tank Capacity U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) LED Headlights (High Beam) LED Front Turn Signal/Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Front Side Marker Lights LED Side Turn Signal Lights*

(on Door Mirrors) LED

Brake Lights LED Rear Side Marker Lights LED Back-Up Lights LED Taillights LED Rear Turn Signal Lights LED High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Light LED Interior Lights

Front and Rear Map Lights

LED

Ambient Lights* LED Vanity Mirror Light* 1.4 W Under Tray Light LED Cargo Area Lights LED

uuSpecificationsu In

fo rm

atio n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 641

Brake Fluid

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

*1: 2WD *2: AWD

Rear Differential Fluid*

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid

Capacity Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 L)*1

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*2

Specified Honda DPSF-II Capacity Change 1.318 US qt (1.247 L)

* Not available on all models

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Recommended Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 API service SN or higher grade 0W-20

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 L) Change including filter

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity 1.57 US gal (5.93 L) (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.65 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire

*1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on the drivers doorjamb.

*2: Models with 215/60R17 *3: Models with 225/55R18

Regular Size*1 215/60R17 96H

225/55R18 98H Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2])

Front 33 (230 [2.3]) Rear 32 (220 [2.2])

Compact Spare

Size T135/90D17 104M Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2])

60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular

17 x 6 1/2J*2

18 x 7J*3

Compact Spare 17 x 4T

642

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 642

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Cover

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicles VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

Vehicle Identification NumberEngine Number

Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number

Continuously Variable Transmission Number

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 643

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

644

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 644

In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 645

In

fo rm

atio n

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicles emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there

for about three minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

646

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 646

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 647

U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

648

uuWarranty Coveragesu

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 648

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use. Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

uuWarranty Coveragesu In

fo rm

atio n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 649

Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov

650

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 650

Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 651

Customer Service Information

In

fo rm

atio n

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 642

Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

In Guam: Triple J Autogroup 157 S. Marine Corps Drive Tamuning, GU 96913 (671) 648-2277

In Saipan, Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands: Joeten Motor Company, Inc. P.O. Box 500680 Saipan, MP 96950 (670) 234-5562

652

In fo

rm atio

n

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 652

Meter Open Source License The software embedded in this product includes open source software. Refer to the following website for details regarding the open source software. https://www.nippon-seiki.co.jp/business_ic_meter/

Index

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 653

A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ……………… 535 Accessories and Modifications ……………. 601 Accessory Power Socket……………………… 196 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow ……………………………… 99, 471

Additives Coolant ………………………………………….. 570 Engine Oil ……………………………………….. 565 Washer …………………………………………… 574

Additives, Engine Oil …………………………. 565 Adjusting

Armrest ………………………………………….. 188 Clock ……………………………………………… 134 Front Seats………………………………………. 180 Head Restraints………………………………… 186 Headlights ………………………………………. 575 Mirrors……………………………………………. 178 Rear Seats……………………………………….. 183 Sound……………………………………… 220, 263 Steering Wheel ………………………………… 177

Agile Handling Assist …………………………. 436 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System)……………………………………………. 203 Changing the Mode……………. 203, 204, 205 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ………………………………………. 206

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………… 595 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode………………. 205 Synchronization Mode ………………………. 208 Using Automatic Climate Control………… 203

Air Pressure ………………………………… 583, 641 Airbags ……………………………………………….. 50

Advanced Airbags ………………………………. 56 Airbag Care……………………………………….. 69 Event Data Recorder ……………………………… 0 Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………………… 53 Indicator ………………………………………. 66, 93 Knee Airbags……………………………………… 58 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ……………… 67 Sensors……………………………………………… 50 Side Airbags ………………………………………. 61 Side Curtain Airbags ……………………………. 64

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ………………………. 437 AM/FM Radio ……………………………… 222, 269 Android AutoTM ………………………….. 240, 308 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ……………… 535

Indicator ……………………………………………. 93 Apple CarPlay …………………………….. 236, 301 Armrest …………………………………………….. 188 Audio………………………………………………… 112 Audio Remote Controls………………………. 215 Audio System ………………………. 212, 219, 244

Adjusting the Sound…………………… 220, 263 Android AutoTM …………………………. 240, 308 Audio/Information Screen…………………… 246 Display Setup…………………………….. 221, 264 Error Messages …………………………………. 314 General Information ………………………….. 316 Home Screen……………………………………. 251 How to Update…………………………………. 257 How to Update Wirelessly…………………… 261

How to Update with a USB Device……….. 262 iPod ………………………………………… 224, 284 Limitations for Manual Operation………………………… 265, 371, 391

MP3/WMA/AAC………………………… 227, 287 Reactivating …………………………………….. 214 Recommended Devices………………………. 317 Remote Controls ………………………………. 215 Security Code…………………………………… 214 Selecting an Audio Source………………….. 265 Start Up ………………………………………….. 245 Status Area ……………………………………… 256 System Updates………………………………… 257 System Updates Settings ……………………. 258 Theft Protection ……………………………….. 214 USB Flash Drives ……………………………….. 317 USB Ports ………………………………………… 213 Wallpaper Setup……………………………….. 249

Audio/Information Screen ………………….. 246 Authorized Manuals ………………………….. 650 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking…………….. 152 Auto High-Beam………………………………… 171

Indicator……………………………………………. 96 Automatic Brake Hold ……………………….. 532

Indicator…………………………………….. 90, 532 Automatic Brake Hold System

Indicator…………………………………….. 90, 532 Automatic Climate Control Sensors …….. 209 Average Fuel Economy ………………………. 110 Average Speed ………………………………….. 112 AWD Torque Distribution Monitor ……… 117

654

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 654

B Battery………………………………………………. 592

Charging System Indicator …………….. 91, 623 If the Battery Is Dead …………………………. 617 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) …….. 592 Maintenance (Replacing)…………………….. 594

Belts (Seat) ………………………………………….. 39 Beverage Holders……………………………….. 193 Blind Spot Information System ……………. 445 Bluetooth Audio ……………………….. 230, 290 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ……….. 369, 389 Booster Seats (For Children)………………….. 82 Brake System……………………………………… 528

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………. 535 Automatic Brake Hold………………………… 532 Brake Assist System …………………………… 536 Fluid ……………………………………………….. 573 Foot Brake ……………………………………….. 531 Indicator (Amber)…………………………. 90, 626 Indicator (Red) ………………… 88, 89, 624, 626 Parking Brake …………………………………… 528

Bulb Replacement………………………………. 575 Back-Up Lights………………………………….. 576 Brake Lights……………………………………… 576 Front Turn Signal/Parking, Daytime Running and Front Side Marker Lights …………….. 575

Headlights ……………………………………….. 575 High-Mount Brake Light …………………….. 576 Rear License Plate Light………………………. 576 Rear Side Marker Lights ……………………… 576 Rear Turn Signal Lights ………………………. 576

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights ……………………………………………. 575

Taillights………………………………………….. 576 Bulb Specifications …………………………….. 640

C Carbon Monoxide Gas …………………………. 83 Cargo Floor Box …………………………………. 195 Carrying Cargo …………………………… 411, 413 Certification Label ……………………………… 642 Changing Bulbs …………………………………. 575 Charging System Indicator…………….. 91, 623 Child Safety…………………………………………. 70

Childproof Door Locks……………………….. 151 Child Seat……………………………………………. 70

Booster Seats …………………………………….. 82 Child Seat for Infants…………………………… 72 Child Seat for Small Children………………… 73 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt………………………………………….. 77

Larger Children ………………………………….. 81 Rear-facing Child Seat …………………………. 72 Selecting a Child Seat………………………….. 74

Childproof Door Locks ……………………….. 151 Cleaning the Exterior …………………………. 598 Cleaning the Interior………………………….. 596 Climate Control System………………………. 203

Changing the Mode …………………… 203, 204 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows……………………………………….. 206

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode………………. 205 Synchronization Mode ………………………. 208 Using Automatic Climate Control………… 203

Clock ………………………………………………… 134 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM) ………………………………………… 453

Coat Hook ………………………………………… 194 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) …………………………………………. 453

Compact Spare Tire…………………….. 605, 641 Console Compartment……………………….. 192 Continuously Variable Transmission ……. 426

Creeping…………………………………………. 426 Kickdown ……………………………………….. 426 Operating the Shift …………………………… 428 Operating the Shift Lever …………………….. 24 Shift Lever Does Not Move…………………. 619 Shifting…………………………………………… 427

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid ………………………………………………. 572

Controls ……………………………………………. 133 Coolant (Engine) ……………………………….. 570

Adding to the Radiator ……………………… 571 Adding to the Reserve Tank ……………….. 570 Overheating…………………………………….. 620

Creeping (Continuously Variable Transmission) …………………………………… 426

Cross Traffic Monitor …………………………. 542 Cup Holders ………………………………………. 193 Customer Service Information ……………. 651 Customize Display ……………………………… 121

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 655

Customized Features …………… 123, 337, 345

D Daytime Running Lights …………………….. 170 Dead Battery …………………………………….. 617 Defaulting All the Settings………….. 344, 368 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows …………………………………………. 206

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …………… 643 Dimming

Headlights ………………………………………. 166 Rearview Mirror ……………………………….. 178

Dipstick (Engine Oil) ………………………….. 566 Display Setup……………………………… 221, 264 Door Mirrors……………………………………… 179 Doors ……………………………………………….. 136

Auto Door Locking……………………………. 152 Auto Door Unlocking ………………………… 152 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator …………. 38 Keys……………………………………………….. 136 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ………………………………………. 149

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ……………………………………. 139

DOT Tire Quality Grading…………………… 585 Drive Mode Switch…………………………….. 429 Driver Attention Monitor …………………… 114 Driver Information Interface ………………. 107

Switching the Display………………………… 107

Driving………………………………………………. 409 Braking……………………………………………. 528 Continuously Variable Transmission ……… 426 Shifting Position ……………………………….. 427 Starting the Engine ……………………………. 418

Dust and Pollen Filter …………………………. 595

E Eco Assist System ……………………………….. 13 ECON Mode Indicator ………………………….. 98 Elapsed Time ……………………………………… 112 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator …………………………………….. 93, 625 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) …………. 434 Emergency ………………………………………… 634 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ……. 645 Engine

Coolant …………………………………………… 570 If the Battery Is Dead …………………………. 617 Number …………………………………………… 642 Oil ………………………………………………….. 565 Starting …………………………………………… 418 Switch Buzzer ……………………………. 164, 165

Engine Coolant ………………………………….. 570 Adding to the Radiator ………………………. 571 Adding to the Reserve Tank………………… 570 Overheating …………………………………….. 620

Engine Oil …………………………………………. 565 Adding ……………………………………………. 567 Checking…………………………………………. 566

Displaying Oil Life……………………………… 556 Engine oil pressure low Warning …………. 622 Recommended Engine Oil ………………….. 565

ENGINE START/STOP Button ……………….. 163 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 83 Exterior Care (Cleaning)……………………… 598 Exterior Mirrors …………………………………. 179

F Features ……………………………………………. 211 Filters

Dust and Pollen ………………………………… 595 Oil………………………………………………….. 568

Flat Tire …………………………………………….. 605 Floor Mats…………………………………………. 597 Fluids

Brake ……………………………………………… 573 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)…………………………………………….. 572

Engine Coolant ………………………………… 570 Windshield Washer …………………………… 574

FM/AM Radio……………………………… 222, 269 Folding Down the Rear Seats ……………… 183 Foot Brake ………………………………………… 531 Front Airbags (SRS)………………………………. 53 Front Seat Heaters……………………………… 202 Front Seats

Adjusting ………………………………………… 180 Front Wide View Camera……………………. 525

656

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 656

Fuel ……………………………………………… 25, 547 Average Fuel Economy……………………….. 110 Economy …………………………………………. 550 Gauge …………………………………………….. 104 Instant Fuel Economy…………………………. 110 Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) …………………… 92 Range……………………………………………… 110 Recommendation ……………………………… 547 Refueling ……………………………………. 25, 547

Fuel Economy…………………………………….. 550 Fuel Fill Cap…………………………………………. 25 Fuel Fill Door………………………………… 25, 548

Unable to Unlock………………………………. 635 Fuses …………………………………………………. 628

Inspecting and Changing ……………………. 632 Locations ………………………………….. 628, 630

G Gasoline (Fuel)

Average Fuel Economy……………………….. 110 Economy …………………………………………. 550 Gauge …………………………………………….. 104 Information ……………………………………… 547 Instant Fuel Economy…………………………. 110 Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) …………………… 92 Refueling …………………………………………. 547

Gauges………………………………………………. 104 Glass (care) …………………………………. 597, 599 Glove Box ………………………………………….. 192

H Handling the Unexpected…………………… 603 HandsFreeLink (HFL)………………….. 369, 389

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History……………………………… 381, 399

Automatic Transferring……………….. 379, 398 Favorite Contacts ………………………. 382, 400 HFL Buttons………………………………. 369, 389 HFL Menus ……………………………….. 372, 392 HFL Status Display ……………………… 371, 391 In Case of Emergency………………………… 406 Limitations for Manual Operation …. 371, 391 Making a Call ……………………………. 384, 402 Options During a Call …………………. 388, 405 Phone Setup……………………………… 374, 394 Receiving a Call …………………………. 387, 404 Ringtone ………………………………….. 379, 398

Hazard Warning Button ………………………… 8 HD RadioTM………………………………………… 270 Head Restraints …………………………………. 186 Headlights…………………………………………. 166

Aiming ……………………………………………. 575 Auto High-Beam ………………………………. 171 Dimming …………………………………………. 166 Operating………………………………………… 166

Heated Steering Wheel………………………. 201 Heated Windshield…………………………….. 176 Heaters (Front Seat) …………………………… 202 HFL (HandsFreeLink)………………….. 369, 389 High Beam Indicator ……………………………. 96 Hill Descent Control System………………… 432

Hill Descent Control System Indicator …… 98 Hill Start Assist System ……………………….. 423 Honda App License Agreement ………….. 318 Honda Sensing ………………………….. 26, 449 HondaLink …………………………………….. 293

I Identification Numbers

Engine and Transmission……………………. 642 Vehicle Identification…………………………. 642

If the Battery Is Dead …………………………. 617 Immobilizer System……………………………. 156

Indicator …………………………………………… 97 Important Handling Information………….. 36 Indicators ……………………………………………. 86

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (Amber) ……………………….. 99

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (White/Green)……………….. 99

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ……………….. 93 Auto High-Beam ………………………………… 96 Automatic Brake Hold………………….. 90, 532 Automatic Brake Hold System ……….. 90, 532 Charging System…………………………. 91, 623 Cruise Mode (White/Green) …………………. 99 ECON Mode ………………………………. 98, 429 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System …………………………………….. 93, 625

Engine oil pressure low Warning …………. 622 High Beam………………………………………… 96

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 657

Hill Descent Control System (White/Green) ………………………………….. 98

Immobilizer System …………………………….. 97 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber) ………………………………………… 100

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (White/Green) ………………………………… 100

Lights On ………………………………………….. 96 Low Fuel (Amber)……………………………….. 92 Low Temperature……………………………….. 92 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ………… 95, 438, 627 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ………….. 91, 623 NORMAL Mode ………………………….. 98, 429 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) …………………………………… 90, 626

Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) …………………………… 88, 89, 624, 626

Safety Support (Amber)……………………… 101 Safety Support (Green/Gray) ………………. 103 Seat Belt Reminder………………………… 41, 92 Security System Alarm…………………………. 97 Shift Position……………………………………… 91 SNOW Mode …………………………………….. 98 Supplemental Restraint System ……….. 66, 93 System Message ………………………………… 98 Transmission System Indicator………………. 91 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning…………… 96 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF .. 94, 435 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System …………………………………….. 94, 434

Information ………………………………………. 639

Instant Fuel Economy …………………………. 110 Instrument Panel …………………………………. 85 Interior Lights ……………………………………. 189 Interior Rearview Mirror …………………….. 178 iPod …………………………………………… 224, 284

J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ……………. 604, 608 Jump Starting ……………………………………. 617

K Keys ………………………………………………….. 136

Number Tag …………………………………….. 137 Rear Door Wont Open………………………. 151 Remote Transmitter …………………………… 145

Kickdown (Continuously Variable Transmission) …………………………………… 426

Knee Airbags ………………………………………. 58

L Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ……… 491 LATCH (Child Seats) ……………………………… 75 Lights …………………………………………. 166, 575

Auto High-Beam……………………………….. 171 Bulb Replacement……………………………… 575 Daytime Running Lights ……………………… 170 High Beam Indicator ……………………………. 96 Interior ……………………………………………. 189 Light Switches ………………………………….. 166

Lights On Indicator ……………………………… 96 Parking Lights…………………………………… 166

Load Limits………………………………………… 413 Locking/Unlocking……………………………… 136

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking……………… 152 Childproof Door Locks……………………….. 151 From Inside ……………………………………… 149 From Outside …………………………………… 139 Keys ……………………………………………….. 136 Using a Key ……………………………………… 146

Low Battery Charge …………………………… 623 Low Fuel Indicator (Amber)………………….. 92 Low Speed Braking Control………………… 465 Low Temperature Indicator………………….. 92 Lower Anchors…………………………………….. 75 Lubricant Specifications Chart…………….. 641 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) …………. 413

M Maintenance……………………………………… 551

Battery ……………………………………………. 592 Brake Fluid ………………………………………. 573 Cleaning …………………………………………. 596 Climate Control System……………………… 595 Coolant…………………………………………… 570 Maintenance Minder …………………………. 555 Oil………………………………………………….. 566 Precautions ……………………………………… 553 Radiator ………………………………………….. 571 Remote Transmitter…………………………… 594

658

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 658

Replacing Light Bulbs…………………………. 575 Safety ……………………………………………… 553 Service Items…………………………………….. 559 Tires ……………………………………………….. 581 Transmission Fluid……………………………… 572 Under the Hood………………………………… 563

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ………….. 91, 623 Map Light Switches ……………………………. 190 Maximum Load Limit………………………….. 413 Meters, Gauges ………………………………….. 104 Mirrors………………………………………………. 178

Adjusting…………………………………………. 178 Door……………………………………………….. 179 Exterior……………………………………………. 179 Interior Rearview……………………………….. 178

Modifications (and Accessories)…………… 601 Moonroof………………………………………….. 162 MP3……………………………………………. 227, 287 Multi-View Rear Camera …………………….. 545

N Navigation…………………………………………. 113 No Content………………………………………… 122 NORMAL Mode Indicator……………………… 98 Numbers (Identification) …………………….. 642

O Odometer………………………………………….. 105 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines………….. 416

Oil (Engine)……………………………………….. 565 Adding……………………………………………. 567 Checking…………………………………………. 566 Displaying Oil Life……………………………… 556 Engine oil pressure low Warning …………. 622 Recommended Engine Oil ………………….. 565 Viscosity ………………………………………….. 565

Open Source Licenses ………………….. 332, 652 Opening and Closing the Moonroof……. 162 Opening/Closing

Hood………………………………………………. 564 Moonroof ……………………………………….. 162 Power Windows ……………………………….. 159 Tailgate …………………………………………… 153

Outside Temperature Display ……………… 105 Overheating………………………………………. 620

P Panic Mode ……………………………………….. 158 Parking……………………………………………… 537 Parking Brake ……………………………………. 528 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) ……………………………………… 90, 626

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) ……………………………… 88, 89, 624, 626

Parking Lights……………………………………. 166 Parking Sensor System ……………………….. 538 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator …………….. 67 Passing Indicators ………………………………. 166 Phone ……………………………………………….. 112

Playing Bluetooth Audio …………… 230, 290 Power Windows ………………………………… 159 Precautions While Driving

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle………………………………………….. 425

Rain ……………………………………………….. 425 Pregnant Women………………………………… 48 Puncture (Tire) ………………………………….. 605

R Radiator ……………………………………………. 571 Radio (FM/AM) …………………………… 222, 269 Radio (SiriusXM) ………………………………. 273 Radio Data System (RDS) …………….. 223, 271 Range……………………………………………….. 110 RDS (Radio Data System) …………….. 223, 271 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) …… 645 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM………………………………………….. 437

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button …………………………………………….. 176

Rear Seats (Folding Down) …………………. 183 Rearview Mirror ………………………………… 178 Refueling …………………………………… 408, 547

Fuel Gauge ……………………………………… 104 Gasoline ………………………………….. 547, 640 Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ………………….. 92

Regulations ………………………… 443, 585, 643 Remote Transmitter …………………………… 145

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 659

Replacement Battery……………………………………………. 594 Bulbs ……………………………………………… 575 Front Wiper Blade Rubber ………………….. 577 Fuses ………………………………………. 628, 630 Tires……………………………………………….. 588 Wiper Blade Rubber ………………………….. 579

Reporting Safety Defects……………………. 644 Resetting a Trip Meter……………………….. 110 Road Departure Mitigation………………… 511

On and Off ……………………………………… 514

S Safe Driving………………………………………… 33 Safety Check ……………………………………….. 38 Safety Labels ………………………………………. 84 Safety Message …………………………………….. 4 Safety Support ………………………………….. 118 Seat Belts ……………………………………………. 39

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor …………….. 46 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners …………….. 43 Checking ………………………………………….. 49 Detachable Anchor …………………………….. 47 Fastening ………………………………………….. 44 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt …………………………………………. 77

Pregnant Women……………………………….. 48 Reminder ………………………………………….. 41 Warning Indicator …………………………. 41, 92

Seat Heaters ……………………………………… 202

Seats …………………………………………………. 180 Adjusting…………………………………………. 180 Front Seat Heaters …………………………….. 202 Front Seats ………………………………………. 180 Rear Seats ……………………………………….. 183

Security System ………………………………….. 156 Immobilizer System Indicator ………………… 97 Security System Alarm Indicator …………….. 97

Selecting a Child Seat …………………………… 74 Selector Knob (Audio) ………………………… 219 Settings …………………………………………….. 123 Shift

Operation………………………………………… 428 Shift Lever ……………………………………. 24, 427

Operation………………………………………….. 24 Releasing…………………………………………. 619 Wont Move …………………………………….. 619

Shift Position Indicator………………….. 91, 428 Shifting (Transmission) ……………………….. 427 Shoulder Anchor………………………………….. 46 Side Airbags ………………………………………… 61 Side Curtain Airbags…………………………….. 64 Siri Eyes Free ……………………………………… 234 SiriusXM Radio …………………………………. 273 Smart Shortcuts …………………………………. 297 SNOW Mode Indicator …………………………. 98 Snow Tires …………………………………………. 590 Spare Tire …………………………………… 605, 641 Spark Plugs………………………………………… 640 Specifications …………………………………….. 640 Specified Fuel……………………………… 547, 640

Speed/Distance Units………………………….. 122 Speedometer …………………………………….. 104 SRS Airbags (Airbags)…………………………… 53 Starting the Engine ……………………………. 418

Does Not Start………………………………….. 612 If the Battery Is Dead …………………………. 617

Steering Wheel Adjusting ………………………………………… 177

Stopping …………………………………………… 537 Summer Tires …………………………………….. 590 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)…….. 53 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel)……………………………………… 8, 9, 163

System Message Indicator…………………….. 98 System Updates …………………………………. 257

T Tachometer……………………………………….. 104 Tailgate …………………………………………….. 153

Unable to Open………………………………… 636 Temperature

Outside Temperature Display………………. 105 Temperature Sensor…………………………… 105 Tie-down Anchors ……………………………… 194 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) …………………………………………….. 438 Indicator…………………………………….. 95, 627

Tires………………………………………………….. 581 Air Pressure ………………………………. 583, 641 Checking and Maintaining …………………. 581

660

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 660

Inspection………………………………………… 582 Labeling…………………………………………… 583 Puncture (Flat Tire)…………………………….. 605 Regulations………………………………………. 585 Rotation ………………………………………….. 589 Spare Tire …………………………………. 605, 641 Summer…………………………………………… 590 Tire Chains ………………………………………. 590 Wear Indicators ………………………………… 587 Winter …………………………………………….. 590

Tools …………………………………………………. 604 Towing a Trailer…………………………………. 415 Towing Behind a Motorhome …………….. 415 Towing Your Vehicle

Emergency……………………………………….. 634 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ……………………………………………. 438 Indicator …………………………………….. 95, 627

Traffic Jam Assist ……………………………….. 502 Traffic Sign Recognition System …… 105, 519 Transmission………………………………………. 427

Continuously Variable………………………… 426 Fluid ……………………………………………….. 572 Number …………………………………………… 642 Shift Position Indicator ………………….. 91, 428

Trip Computer……………………………………. 248 Trip Meter …………………………………………. 110 Troubleshooting ………………………………… 603

Blown Fuse ……………………………….. 628, 630 Brake Pedal Vibrates ……………………………. 30 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ………. 31

Emergency Towing……………………………. 634 Engine Wont Start……………………………. 612 Noise When Braking……………………………. 31 Overheating …………………………………….. 620 Puncture/Flat Tire ……………………………… 605 Rear Door Wont Open…………………. 30, 151 Shift Lever Wont Move……………………… 619 Warning Indicators ……………………………… 86

Turn Signals Indicators (Instrument Panel) ………………… 96

U USB Flash Drives …………… 212, 227, 287, 317 USB Ports…………………………………………… 213

V Vanity Mirrors……………………………………… 11 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ……. 642 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) ………….. 434

Off Button……………………………………….. 435 OFF Indicator……………………………………… 94 System Indicator…………………………………. 94

Viscosity (Oil) ……………………………… 565, 641 Voice Control Operation…………………….. 266

Audio Commands …………………………….. 267 General Commands ………………………….. 267 List Commands ………………………………… 268 Navigation Commands ………………………. 268 Phone Commands…………………………….. 267

Standard Commands ………………………… 268 Voice Portal Screen …………………………… 267 Voice Recognition …………………………….. 266

VSA (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) ………….. 434

W Walk away auto lock ………………………. 142 Wallpaper …………………………………………. 249 Warning Indicator On/Blinking …………… 622 Warning Labels …………………………………… 84 Warnings ………………………………………….. 122 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) ………………………………………. 647

Watts ……………………………………………….. 640 Wear Indicators (Tire) ………………………… 587 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) … 604, 608 Wi-Fi Connection ………………………………. 300 Window Washers ………………………………. 174

Adding/Refilling Fluid ………………………… 574 Switch ……………………………………………. 174

Windshield ……………………………………….. 174 Cleaning ………………………………….. 597, 599 Defrosting/Defogging ………………… 176, 206 Washer Fluid……………………………………. 574 Wiper Blades……………………………………. 577 Wipers and Washers …………………………. 174

Winter Tires Snow Tires ………………………………………. 590 Tire Chains………………………………………. 590

In d

ex

23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 661

Wipers and Washers ………………………….. 174 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ……………………………………. 577, 579

Wireless Charger ……………………………….. 197 WMA…………………………………………. 227, 287 Worn Tires …………………………………. 581, 587

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the HR-V Honda works, you can view and download the Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner’s Manual for Honda HR-V as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner’s Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda HR-V. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda HR-V 2023 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.

скачать руководство Honda HR-V

Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и техническому обслуживанию переднеприводного и полноприводного автомобиля Honda HR-V начиная с 1998 года выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями D16A, D16W1, D16W2.

Содержание

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ…… 9
ОБОРУДОВАНИЕ И ОРГАНЫ УПРАВЛЕНИЯ……..9
ОБОРУДОВАНИЕ САЛОНА………………..10
ПРИБОРЫ, КОНТРОЛЬНЫЕ И СИГНАЛЬНЫЕ ЛАМПЫ……………………………. 11
ОБОРУДОВАНИЕ КУЗОВА……………….. 11
КОНТРОЛЬНЫЕ ЛАМПЫ………………….12
ИНДИКАТОРНЫЕ ЛАМПЫ……………….. 12
ПЕРЕКЛЮЧАТЕЛИ……………………..13
УПРАВЛЕНИЕ АВТОМОБИЛЕМ……………. 15
СИСТЕМА БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ……………… 17
АНТИБЛОКИРОВОЧНАЯ СИСТЕМА ТОРМОЗОВ (ABS)………………………………17
КОНДИЦИОНЕР………………………. 18
ДЕЙСТВИЯ В ЭКСТРЕМАЛЬНЫХ СИТУАЦИЯХ 22
ОТКАЗЫ ЭЛЕКТРООБОРУДОВАНИЯ………… 25
ПЕРЕСТАНОВКА КОЛЁС……………….. 27
ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ДАННЫЕ……………….. 28
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ………………….29
ИДЕНТИФИКАЦИОННЫЙ НОМЕР АВТОМОБИЛЯ(VIN)……………………………… 29
СТАНДАРТНЫЕ ЗНАЧЕНИЯ И ПРЕДЕЛЬНЫЙ ИЗНОС……………………………… 32
ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКИ………… 38
ТЕХНИЧЕСКОЕ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕ…… 42
ТОЧКИ СМАЗКИ………………………. 42
ГРАФИК ТЕХНИЧЕСКОГО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЯ…… 43
ЭЛЕКТРООБОРУДОВАНИЕ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ 46
СИСТЕМА ЗАПУСКА…………………… 46
СИСТЕМА ЗАЖИГАНИЯ………………….50
СИСТЕМА ЗАРЯДКИ…………………… 54
МЕХАНИЧЕСКАЯ ЧАСТЬ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ.. 61
СНЯТИЕ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ…………………… 61
УСТАНОВКА ДВИГАТЕЛЯ……………….. 64
ГАЗОРАСПРЕДЕЛИТЕЛЬНЫЙ МЕХАНИЗМ……..66
РЕГУЛИРОВКА КЛАПАННЫХ ЗАЗОРОВ…… 66
ШКИВ КОЛЕНЧАТОГО ВАЛА…………….66
РЕМЕНЬ ГРМ…………………………67
РЕГУЛИРОВКА НАТЯЖЕНИЯ………….. 67
СНЯТИЕ………………………… 68
УСТАНОВКА……………………….69
ЗАМЕНА ВЫПУСКНОГО КОЛЛЕКТОРА…………70
ЗАМЕНА ВПУСКНОГО КОЛЛЕКТОРА………… 70
ЗАМЕНА ВЫХЛОПНОЙ ТРУБЫ И ГЛУШИТЕЛЯ…… 71
ГОЛОВКА БЛОКА ЦИЛИНДРОВ……………. 72
СНЯТИЕ………………………… 73
КЛАПАННЫЕ КОРОМЫСЛА……………. 75
СНЯТИЕ…………………….. 75
РАЗБОРКА/СБОРКА……………… 75
КЛАПАННЫЕ КОРОМЫСЛА И ОСИ………. 75
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ……………. 75
РАСПРЕДЕЛИТЕЛЬНЫЙ ВАЛ………….. 76
ПРОВЕРКА…………………… 76
КЛАПАНЫ, ПРУЖИНЫ И САЛЬНИКИ…….. 76
СНЯТИЕ…………………….. 76
НАПРАВЛЯЮЩИЕ КЛАПАНОВ…………..77
ХОД КЛАПАНА…………………. 77
ГОЛОВКА ЦИЛИНДРОВ……………… 77
КОРОБЛЕНИЕ…………………. 77
СЕДЛА КЛАПАНОВ…………………. 77
ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ……………… 77
НАПРАВЛЯЮЩИЕ ВТУЛКИ КЛАПАНОВ…… 78
ЗАМЕНА…………………….. 78
РАЗВЕРТЫВАНИЕ…………………. 78
КЛАПАНЫ, ПРУЖИНЫ И СЕДЛА………… 78
УСТАНОВКА…………………… 78
РАСПРЕДЕЛИТЕЛЬНЫЙ ВАЛ, КЛАПАННЫЕ
КОРОМЫСЛА, САЛЬНИК И……………. 79
ШКИВ РАСПРЕДЕЛИТЕЛЬНОГО ВАЛА……..79
УСТАНОВКА…………………… 79
ГОЛОВКА ЦИЛИНДРОВ……………… 79
УСТАНОВКА…………………… 79
БЛОК ЦИЛИНДРОВ И ПОРШНЕВАЯ ГРУППА…… 81
ЗАМЕНА………………………… 82
МАХОВИК И ПРИВОДНОЙ ДИСК…………….82
ШАТУН И КОЛЕНЧАТЫЙ ВАЛ……………… 83
КОРЕННЫЕ ПОДШИПНИКИ………………..83
ШАТУННЫЕ ПОДШИПНИКИ………………..84
ПОРШНИ И КОЛЕНЧАТЫЙ ВАЛ……………. 85
КОЛЕНЧАТЫЙ ВАЛ……………………..85
ПОРШНИ…………………………….86
БЛОК ЦИЛИНДРОВ……………………..86
ПРОВЕРКА…………………….. 86
ХОНИНГОВАНИЕ СТЕНОК ЦИЛИНДРОВ….86
ПОРШНЕВЫЕ ПАЛЬЦЫ………………….87
ШАТУНЫ………………………….. 87
ПОРШНЕВЫЕ КОЛЬЦА………………….88
САЛЬНИК КОЛЕНЧАТОГО ВАЛА………….. 89
ПОРШНИ………………………….. 89
КОЛЕНЧАТЫЙ ВАЛ…………………… 89
МАСЛЯНЫЙ ПОДДОН…………………. 90
СИСТЕМА СМАЗКИ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ…….. 92
МОТОРНОЕ МАСЛО…………………… 93
ПРОВЕРКА………………………. 93
ЗАМЕНА………………………… 93
МАСЛЯНЫЙ ФИЛЬТР…………………… 93
ЗАМЕНА………………………… 93
ТРЕБОВАНИЯ К МАСЛУ……………… 93
ЗАПРАВОЧНАЯ ЕМКОСТЬ……………. 93
ИНТЕРВАЛ ЗАМЕНЫ……………….. 93
ДАТЧИК ДАВЛЕНИЯ МАСЛА……………… 94
МАСЛЯНЫЙ НАСОС…………………… 94
РЕМОНТ………………………… 94
СНЯТИЕ/ПРОВЕРКА/УСТАНОВКА…………94
СИСТЕМА ОХЛАЖДЕНИЯ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ 96
РАДИАТОР………………………… 96
ЗАМЕНА…………………………97
ЗАПРАВКА ОХЛАЖДАЮЩЕЙ ЖИДКОСТЬЮ И ПРОКАЧКА……………………….97
ИСПЫТАНИЕ КРЫШКИ……………… 98
ИСПЫТАНИЕ НА УТЕЧКУ……………. 98
ТЕРМОСТАТ………………………… 98
ЗАМЕНА…………………………98
ИСПЫТАНИЕ…………………….. 98
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….99
ВОДЯНОЙ НАСОС……………………..99
ЗАМЕНА…………………………99
УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ВЕНТИЛЯТОРОМ………….. 100
УКАЗАТЕЛЬ ТЕМПЕРАТУРЫ ОХЛАЖДАЮЩЕЙ ЖИДКОСТИ ДВИГАТЕЛЯ………….. 101
ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ УКАЗАТЕЛЯ………… 101
ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ ДАТЧИКА………….. 101
ТОПЛИВНАЯ СИСТЕМА ДВИГАТЕЛЯ И СИСТЕМА СНИЖЕНИЯ
ТОКСИЧНОСТИ ВЫХЛОПА…………………………102
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ СОЕДИНЕНИЯ…………..105
СПОСОБЫ ПОИСКА И УСТРАНЕНИЯ НЕИСПРАВ НОСТЕЙ………………………….. 108
КАК НАЧАТЬ ПОИСК НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ…….. 108
ПОИСК И УСТРАНЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ……….108
ПРОЦЕДУРА ОБНУЛЕНИЯ МОДУЛЯ УПРАВЛЕНИЯДВИГАТЕЛЕМ/СИЛОВОЙ ПЕРЕДАЧЕЙ
(ЕСМ/РСМ)…… 108
ЗАВЕРШАЮЩАЯ ПРОЦЕДУРА…………….108
ПОДСТАНОВКА ЗАВЕДОМО ИСПРАВНОГО МОДУЛЯ ЕСМ/РСМ
(МОДЕЛИ KG, КЕ, KQ,KU.KN)………108
СНЯТИЕ МОДУЛЯ ЕСМ/РСМ………………109
ПРОВЕРКА КОНТАКТОВ В РАЗЪЕМАХ МОДУЛЯ ЕСМ/РСМ 109
РАСПОЛОЖЕНИЕ КОНТАКТОВ В РАЗЪЕМАХ МОДУЛЯ УПРАВЛЕНИЯ
ДВИГАТЕЛЕМ/СИЛОВОЙ ПЕРЕДАЧЕЙ 110
ТАБЛИЦА ДИАГНОСТИЧЕСКИХ КОДОВ НЕИСПРАВНОСТИ (DTC) 113
СИСТЕМА ВПРЫСКА ТОПЛИВА PGM-R 114
ОПИСАНИЕ СИСТЕМЫ 114
СИСТЕМА PGM-FI 114
ОПЕРЕЖЕНИЕ И ДЛИТЕЛЬНОСТЬ ВПРЫСКА ТОПЛИВА 114
РЕГУЛИРОВАНИЕ ПОДАЧИ ВОЗДУХА НА ОБОРОТАХ Х.Х. 114
УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ОПЕРЕЖЕНИЕМ ЗАЖИГАНИЯ 114
ПРОЧИЕ ФУНКЦИИ УПРАВЛЕНИЯ 114
СИГНАЛЫ НА ВХОДЕ 114
ФУНКЦИИ ОТКАЗОУСТОЙЧИВОСТИ/РЕЗЕРВИРОВАНИЯ МОДУЛЯ ЕСМ/РСМ…. 114
СИГНАЛЫ НА ВЫХОДЕ 114
ПОДОГРЕВАЕМЫЙ ДАТЧИК КИСЛОРОДА.. 115
СИСТЕМА РЕГ. ОБОРОТОВ Х.Х. 115
ОПИСАНИЕ СИСТЕМЫ 115
РЕГУЛИРОВАНИЕ ОБОРОТОВ Х.Х. 115
ПРОВЕРКА/РЕГУЛИРОВКА 115
ТОПЛИВНАЯ СИСТЕМА..116
ТОПЛИВОПРОВОДЫ……………… 116
ТОПЛИВНАЯ ТРУБКА/БЫСТРОСЪЕМНЫЕ
СОЕДИНЕНИЯ………………………… 117
СИСТЕМА ПОДАЧИ ТОПЛИВА……………… 118
ОПИСАНИЕ СИСТЕМЫ……………………118
ДАВЛЕНИЕТОПЛИВА…………………… 118
СБРОС ДАВЛЕНИЯ…………………….. 118
ПРОВЕРКА………………………….. 118
ТОПЛИВНЫЕ ФОРСУНКИ…………………. 118
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 119
ИСПЫТАНИЕ………………………… 119
ЗАМЕНА……………………………. 119
РЕГУЛЯТОР ДАВЛЕНИЯ ТОПЛИВА………….. 120
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 120
ИСПЫТАНИЕ………………………… 120
ЗАМЕНА……………………………. 120
ТОПЛИВНЫЙ ФИЛЬТР…………………… 120
ЗАМЕНА……………………………. 120
ТОПЛИВНЫЙ НАСОС…………………… 120
ИСПЫТАНИЕ………………………… 120
ЗАМЕНА……………………………. 121
УКАЗАТЕЛЬ УРОВНЯ ТОПЛИВА……………. 121
ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ………………………. 121
ДАТЧИК УКАЗАТЕЛЯ УРОВНЯ ТОПЛИВА 122
ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ………………………. 122
СИГНАЛЬНАЯ ЛАМПА НИЗКОГО УРОВНЯ ТОПЛИВА…………………………….122
ИНЕРЦИОННЫЙ ВЫКЛЮЧАТЕЛЬ (МОДЕЛИ KG.KE)………………………………123
ГЛАВНОЕ РЕЛЕ PGM-FI…………………. 123
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 123
ТЕСТИРОВАНИЕ РЕЛЕ……………………123
ТОПЛИВНЫЙ БАК……………………….123
ЗАМЕНА……………………………. 123
СИСТЕМА ПОДАЧИ ВОЗДУХА……………… 124
ОПИСАНИЕ СИСТЕМЫ……………………124
ВОЗДУШНЫЙ ФИЛЬТР (ACL)………………..124
ЗАМЕНА ФИЛЬТРУЮЩЕГО ЭЛЕМЕНТА
(ACL)……………………………… 124
ТРОС ДРОССЕЛЬНОЙ ЗАСЛОНКИ…………….124
ПРОВЕРКА/РЕГУЛИРОВКА……………….. 124
УСТАНОВКА…………………………..124
КОРПУС ДРОССЕЛЬНОЙ ЗАСЛОНКИ….125
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 125
ПРОВЕРКА………………………….. 125
СНЯТИЕ……………………………. 125
РАЗБОРКА………………………….. 125
СИСТЕМА СНИЖЕНИЯ ТОКСИЧНОСТИ ВЫХЛОПА……………………………….. 125
ОПИСАНИЕ СИСТЕМЫ……………………125
ВЫХЛОПНЫЕ ГАЗЫ…………………….. 126
ПРОВЕРКА………………………….. 126
СИСТЕМА ПРИНУДИТЕЛЬНОЙ ВЕНТИЛЯЦИИ
КАРТЕРА (PCV)………………………. 126
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 126
ТРЕХХОДОВОЙ КАТАЛИТИЧЕСКИЙ НЕЙТРА
ЛИЗАТОР (TWC)………………………. 126
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 126
ПРОВЕРКА………………………….. 126
СИСТЕМА УЛАВЛИВАНИЯ ПАРОВ ТОПЛИВА
(EVAP)………………………………127
ОПИСАНИЕ………………………….. 127
ПРОВЕРКА (МОДЕЛИ БЕЗ TWC)……………. 127
ПРОВЕРКА ДВУХХОДОВОГО КЛАПАНА
EVAP………………………………..128
СЦЕПЛЕНИЕ……………………….129
ПЕДАЛЬ СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ……………….. 129
РЕГУЛИРОВКА…………………. 129
ГЛАВНЫЙ ЦИЛИНДР СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ…………130
РЕМОНТ/ПРОВЕРКА……………… 130
ГЛАВНЫЙ ЦИЛИНДР СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ…………130
ЗАМЕНА……………………….130
ГЛАВНЫЙ ЦИЛИНДР СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ…………131
РАЗБОРКА/СБОРКА……………… 131
РАБОЧИЙ ЦИЛИНДР СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ…………131
РЕМОНТ/ПРОВЕРКА……………… 131
ЗАМЕНА……………………….132
НАЖИМНОЙ ДИСК……………………132
СНЯТИЕ/ПРОВЕРКА……………… 132
ВЕДОМЫЙ ДИСК СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ………….. 132
СНЯТИЕ/ПРОВЕРКА……………… 132
МАХОВИК………………………… 133
ПРОВЕРКА……………………..133
ЗАМЕНА……………………….133
ВЕДОМЫЙ ДИСК СЦЕПЛЕНИЯ/НАЖИМНОЙ ДИСК…………………………….133
УСТАНОВКА…………………….. 133
ВЫЖИМНОЙ ПОДШИПНИК……………….. 134
СНЯТИЕ/ПРОВЕРКА………………….134
УСТАНОВКА…………………….. 134
МЕХАНИЧЕСКАЯ КОРОБКА ПЕРЕДАЧ 135
ТЕХНИЧЕСКОЕ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕ……………. 135
ТРАНСМИССИОННАЯ ЖИДКОСТЬ…………..135
ЕМКОСТЬ МАСЛА……………….. 135
ВЫКЛЮЧАТЕЛЬ ФОНАРЕЙ ЗАДНЕГО ХОДА…….135
РАЗДАТОЧНАЯ КОРОБКА………………….135
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….135
СНЯТИЕ…………………………135
УСТАНОВКА…………………….. 136
МЕХАНИЗМ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ПЕРЕДАЧ…. 136
СНЯТИЕ КОРОБКИ ПЕРЕДАЧ………………..136
КОРОБКА ПЕРЕДАЧ…………………… 140
КАРТЕР КОРОБКИ ПЕРЕДАЧ…………….141
РАЗБОРКА…………………… 141
КРЫШКА/ОСЬ ПОВОДКА ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
ПЕРЕДАЧ В СБОРЕ…………………. 143
РАЗБОРКА/СБОРКА……………… 143
КРЫШКА ПОВОДКА ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ В СБОРЕ……………………….143
ОСЬ ПОВОДКА ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ПЕРЕДАЧ В СБОРЕ………………………….. 143
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ………….. 143
ДЕРЖАТЕЛЬ ВИЛКИ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ЗАДНЕГО ХОДА……………………….144
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ………….. 144
ВИЛКИ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЯ В СБОРЕ……144
РАЗБОРКА/СБОРКА………….. 144
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ………….. 145
ВТОРИЧНЫЙ ВАЛ…………………… 145
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ……………… 146
РАЗБОРКА………………………. 146
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….147
СБОРКА………………………… 147
ПРОМЕЖУТОЧНЫЙ ВАЛ………………..148
ПРОВЕРКА ЗАЗОРОВ……………… 148
РАЗБОРКА………………………. 149
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….149
СБОРКА………………………… 149
ОБОЙМА И СТУПИЦА СИНХРОНИЗАТОРА……….. 151
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….151
УСТАНОВКА…………………….. 151
КОЛЬЦО, ШЕСТЕРНЯ СИНХРОНИЗАТОРА…………… 151
ДИФФЕРЕНЦИАЛ…………………… 152
ПРОВЕРКА/ЗАМЕНА……………… 153
ЗАМЕНА НАРУЖНОГО КОЛЬЦА ПОДШИПНИКА……………………………. 153
РЕГУЛИРОВКА ПРЕДНАТЯГА КОНИЧЕСКОГО РОЛИКОПОДШИПНИКА………….. 154
ЗАМЕНА САЛЬНИКА………………..154
РАЗДАТОЧНАЯ КОРОБКА……………… 155
МОМЕНТЫ ЗАТЯЖКИ……………… 155
ПРОВЕРКА……………………….156
ИЗМЕРЕНИЕ ЗАЗОРА В ШЕСТЕРНЕ РАЗДАТОЧНОЙ КОРОБКИ
(ГИПОИДНОЙ ШЕСТЕРНЕ)……………………………. 156
ИЗМЕРЕНИЕ ПОЛНОГО ПУСКОВОГО МОМЕНТА…………………………..156
ПРОВЕРКА ПЯТНА КОНТАКТА В ШЕСТЕРНЕ РАЗДАТОЧНОЙ КОРОБКИ
(ГИПОИДНОЙШЕСТЕРНЕ)…………………….. 156
РАЗБОРКА………………………. 156
ЗАМЕНА ПОДШИПНИКА ВЕДУЩЕЙ ШЕСТЕРНИ РАЗДАТОЧНОЙ КОРОБКИ…… 157
РАЗБОРКА/СБОРКА ВАЛА РАЗДАТОЧНОЙКОРОБКИ………………………. 157
ЗАМЕНА НАРУЖНОГО КОЛЬЦА ПОДШИПНИКАКРЫШКИ А РАЗДАТОЧНОЙ КОРОБКИ…. 158
ЗАМЕНА НАРУЖНОГО КОЛЬЦА ПОДШИПНИКА КАРТЕРА РАЗДАТОЧНОЙ КОРОБКИ 158
СБОРКА………………………… 158
ПОРЯДОК СБОРКИ……………. 158
ПОДБОР УПОРНОЙ ШАЙБЫ 35-ММ 158
ПЕРЕДНИЙ ПОДШИПНИК/САЛЬНИК….163
ЗАМЕНА…………………….. 163
ПОДШИПНИК ПРОМЕЖУТОЧНОГО ВАЛА ……………164
ЗАМЕНА…………………….. 164
УПОРНЫЙ ЗАЗОР ВТОРИЧНОГО ВАЛА………. 164
РЕГУЛИРОВКА……………….. 164
КОРОБКА ПЕРЕДАЧ……………………166
СБОРКА…………………….. 166
УСТАНОВКА…………………. 168
АВТОМАТИЧЕСКАЯ КОРОБКА ПЕРЕДАЧ …………172
ОПИСАНИЕ…………………………..172
КОРОБКА ПЕРЕДАЧ………………….172
ПОЛОЖЕНИЯ РЫЧАГА СЕЛЕКТОРА…………172
ЭЛЕКТРОННОЕ УПРАВЛЕНИЕ…………….172
УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ГИДРОПРИВОДОМ…………..172
МЕХАНИЗМ УПРАВЛЕНИЯ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕДАЧ………………………….. 173
ИНДИКАТОР ДИАПАЗОНОВ АВТОМАТИЧЕСКОЙ КОРОБКИ ПЕРЕДАЧ (АКП)

Язык: русский
Формат: DJVU
Страниц: 395

Скачать с

Внимание! У Вас нет прав для просмотра скрытого текста.

Сообщить о ошибке
Размещено в разделе Руководства для авто, 1.06.2011 г.,
Просмотров 5 977,
Комментариев 0

Еще похожие на «Руководство по ремонту и обслуживанию Honda HR-V с 1998 года выпуска» материалы:

Сейчас посетители сайта читают следующие материалы на ГомельАвто:

  • Урал Мотоцикл. Эксплуатация, обслуживание, ремонт
    В книге изложено описание работ по ремонту и тех. обслуживанию мотоциклов «Урал» новых моделей («Волк», «Вояж», «Gear-Up» и др.)

  • Иж Планета. Ремонт, Обслуживание.
    Описание работ по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту мотоцикла Иж-Планета в условиях гаражной мастерской. Все рабочие операции сопровождаются фотографиями и подробными комментариями, что позволяет экономить время, силы и средства, а также свести к минимуму риск повреждения техники.Для мотоциклистов, занимающихся самостоятельным обслуживанием и ремонтом мотоциклов.

  • Руководство по эксплуатации KIA Cee’d
    Руководство по эксплуатации KIA Cee’d

  • Комментарии к этому материалу:

     

    Honda

     
    Honda HR-V: Модели с бензиновыми двигателями выпуска с 1998 г. с бензиновыми двигателями. Инструкция по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт Honda HR-V: Модели с бензиновыми двигателями выпуска с 1998 г. с бензиновыми двигателями. Инструкция по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Автонавигатор Год: 2006 Страниц: 400 Дата загрузки: 15 июня 2008

       В данном руководстве представлено заводское руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту переднеприводных и полноприводных автомобилей Honda HR-V выпуска с 1998 г. с бензиновыми двигателями D16A, D16W1, D16W2. В издании представлено описание по регулировке и ремонту систем управления бензиновыми двигателями, описание работы самодиагностики различных систем (двигателя, АКП, ABS), подробные инструкции по ремонту механических и бесступенчатых автоматичеких (Honda Multi Matic CVT) коробок передач, механизма дифференциала (Real-Time 4WD), регулировке и ремонту элементов тормозной системы (включая систему ABS), рулевого управления, подвески, дополнительной системы безопасности и кузова. В случае ремонта, данное руководство послужит незаменимым средством по выявлению и устранению неисправностей во всех компонентах автомобиля. Пошаговое и наглядное описание ремонтных процедур, изобилие рисунков, обширные справочные ремонтные данные позволят квалифицированно подобрать варианты замены запчастей, произвести соответствующие регулировки, правку кузова и т.д. Книга предназначена для персонала СТО, ремонтных мастерских и автовладельцев.
     
    Honda Legend: Руководство по эксплуатации Honda Legend: Руководство по эксплуатации
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Арус Год: 2010 Страниц: 218 Дата загрузки: 14 февраля 2012

       Для того чтобы Вы могли постоянно испытывать чувство удовлетворения, эксплуатируя свой новый автомобиль Honda, изучите предлагаемую Инструкцию по устройству и эксплуатации. В инструкции описаны особенности устройства различных средств пассивной безопасности водителя и пассажиров, приведены рекомендации по использованию органов управления автомобилем и разнообразного оборудования, которое предназначено для обеспечения удобства и комфорта.
     
    Honda Odyssey: Модели 2WD, 4WD выпуска 1999-2003 гг. с бензиновым двигателем F23A. Руководство по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт Honda Odyssey: Модели 2WD, 4WD выпуска 1999-2003 гг. с бензиновым двигателем F23A. Руководство по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Автонавигатор Год: 2009 Страниц: 560 Дата загрузки: 27 апреля 2013

       В издании представлено руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобилей Honda Odyssey выпуска 1999-2003 гг., оснащенных бензиновым двигателем F23A. Издание содержит подробные инструкции по обслуживанию, диагностике, ремонту и регулировке двигателя, системы управления двигателем VTEC, системы Real Time 4WD, автоматической коробки передач, тормозной системы, рулевого управления, системы круиз-контроля и т.д. Представлены электросхемы, процедуры по выявлению неисправностей и коды самодиагностики основных узлов автомобиля. Подробно описана конструкция кузова и электрооборудование автомобиля. В случае ремонта, данное руководство послужит незаменимым средством по выявлению и устранению неисправностей во всех компонентах автомобиля. Пошаговое и наглядное описание ремонтных процедур, изобилие рисунков, обширные справочные ремонтные данные позволят квалифицированно подобрать варианты замены запчастей, произвести соответствующие регулировки, правку кузова и т.д. Книга предназначена для персонала СТО, ремонтных мастерских и автовладельцев.
     
    Honda Odyssey 2000-2003: Инструкция по эксплуатации Honda Odyssey 2000-2003: Инструкция по эксплуатации
    Автор: Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 256 Дата загрузки: 26 мая 2011

       В данной книге приведены инструкции и описания, ознакомление с которыми способствует рациональной эксплуатации автомобиля Honda Odyssey, а также правильному использованию его оборудования. При отсутствии времени на скрупулезное изучение каждой страницы, для краткого ознакомления с автомобилем рекомендуется прочесть только лишь первую главу. В книге описываются автомобили указанной модели, которые выпускались с 2000 по 2003 г. На данных страницах рассматриваются модификации VG, VZ, S, М, МО, а также Land Absolute Series. К данной книге всегда следует обращаться при возникновении вопросов, связанных с эксплуатацией Honda Odyssey. Руководство окажется весьма полезным справочником для владельцев автомобилей Honda Odyssey.
     
    Honda Odyssey с 2004 г: Инструкция по эксплуатации Honda Odyssey с 2004 г: Инструкция по эксплуатации
    Автор: Калюков А.Т. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 326 Дата загрузки: 26 февраля 2010

       Благодарим за приобретение руководства по эксплуатации автомобилей «Honda Odyssey». В данном руководстве приведены подробные инструкции по эксплуатации. Для краткого ознакомления с автомобилем рекомендуется прочесть первую главу. В данной книге описаны модели Honda Odyssey 2004 г. выпуска. Типы автомобилей: S, М, Ln Absolute. Следует всегда обращаться к данной книге при возникновении вопросов, связанных с эксплуатацией Honda Odyssey. Руководство окажется полезным для владельца автомобиля.
     
    Honda Odyssey / CR-V 1995-2000 г: выпуска. Бензиновые двигатели 2. 0, 2. 2, 2. 3, 3. 5 л. Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации Honda Odyssey / CR-V 1995-2000 г: выпуска. Бензиновые двигатели 2. 0, 2. 2, 2. 3, 3. 5 л. Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации
    Автор: Луночкина А.П. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 406 Дата загрузки: 22 марта 2011

       Руководство содержит: общие сведения об устройстве автомобилей Honda Odyssey / CR-V и их модификаций, рекомендации по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию, описание возможных неисправностей двигателя, трансмиссии, ходовой части, рулевого управления, тормозной системы. Советы, приведенные в данном руководстве, помогут провести ТО и сделать ремонт, как на станции технического обслуживания, так и своими силами.
     
    Honda Partner 1996-2001: Инструкция по эксплуатации Honda Partner 1996-2001: Инструкция по эксплуатации
    Автор: Калюков А.Т. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 184 Дата загрузки: 21 июня 2010

       В данном руководстве приведены подробные инструкции по эксплуатации. Для краткого ознакомления с автомобилем рекомендуется прочитать первую главу. Описываемые модели имеют множество функций, использование которых описано на следующих страницах. В руководстве приведены рекомендации по управлению автомобилем с коробкой-автоматом, описано устройство и принцип действия системы пассивной безопасности SRS, а также содержится значительный объем другой полезной при эксплуатации автомобиля информации. В книге приводятся всевозможные данные по проведению обслуживания. Техническое обслуживание автомобиля следует проводить при использовании сервисной книжки, что позволит строго соблюдать порядок и периодичность выполнения работ. В данном руководстве описаны следующие модели, выпускавшиеся с 1996 по 2002 год включительно: Honda Partner VAN 1.5 GL LB-EY7, 1.6 GL LB-EY8, а также модели 1.6 EL LB-EY8 с приводом на два (2WD) и четыре (4WD) колеса. Следует всегда обращаться к данной книге при потребности в рекомендациях по эксплуатации Honda Partner. Авторы надеются на то, что руководство окажется полезным для владельца автомобиля.
     
    Honda Stream с 2000 г: Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации Honda Stream с 2000 г: Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации
    Автор: Миронов М.Е. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 308 Дата загрузки: 14 июля 2009

       Руководство содержит: общие сведения об устройстве автомобилей Honda Stream с 2000 г. и их модификаций, рекомендации по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию, описание возможных неисправностей двигателя, трансмиссии, ходовой части, рулевого управления, тормозной системы. Советы, приведенные в Данном руководстве, помогут провести ТО и сделать ремонт, как на станции технического обслуживания, так и своими силами.
     
    Honda Accord: Выпуск с 2008 г. Бензиновые двигатели: 2. 0, 2. 4 л. Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и техническому обслуживанию Honda Accord: Выпуск с 2008 г. Бензиновые двигатели: 2. 0, 2. 4 л. Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и техническому обслуживанию
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Арго-Авто Год: 2010 Страниц: 760 Дата загрузки: 17 сентября 2015

       Данное руководство содержит общие сведения об устройстве автомобилей Honda Accord с 2003 года выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями 2.0 и 2.4 л. В связи с постоянной работой по усовершенствованию конструкции автомобиля в нее могут быть внесены незначительные изменения, не отображенные в данном руководстве.
     
    Honda Jazz/Fit: Выпуска с 2002 г. Руководство по эксплуатации Honda Jazz/Fit: Выпуска с 2002 г. Руководство по эксплуатации
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: MoToR Год: 2008 Страниц: 400 Дата загрузки: 15 апреля 2012

       Данное «Руководство по эксплуатации» предназначено для того, чтобы помочь владельцу изучить устройство и функционирование систем автомобиля, а также дать сведения по его техническому обслуживанию. Правильная эксплуатация в соответствии с рекомендациями завода-изготовителя обеспечит машине долгий срок службы и позволит вам получать удовольствие за рулем своего автомобиля на протяжении многих лет.
     
    Honda Civic VIII: Выпуска с 2006 г. Руководство по эксплуатации Honda Civic VIII: Выпуска с 2006 г. Руководство по эксплуатации
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: MoToR Год: 2008 Страниц: 476 Дата загрузки: 22 сентября 2013

       Данное «Руководство по эксплуатации» предназначено для того, чтобы помочь владельцу изучить устройство и функционирование систем автомобиля, а также дать сведения по его техническому обслуживанию.
     
    Honda Accord VІІ / Euro / Tourer: Выпуска 2003-2007 гг. Руководство по эксплуатации Honda Accord VІІ / Euro / Tourer: Выпуска 2003-2007 гг. Руководство по эксплуатации
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: MoToR Год: 2010 Страниц: 512 Дата загрузки: 18 июля 2011

       Данное «Руководство по эксплуатации» предназначено для того, чтобы помочь владельцу изучить устройство и функционирование систем автомобиля, а также дать сведения по его техническому обслуживанию.
     
    Honda Orthia: 1996-2002. Инструкция по эксплуатации Honda Orthia: 1996-2002. Инструкция по эксплуатации
    Автор: Омелич Н.В. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 246 Дата загрузки: 15 декабря 2010

       В данном руководстве рассмотрено множество аспектов эксплуатации автомобиля Honda Orthia, для того чтобы дать вам необходимую уверенность в том, что вы правильно обращаетесь с автомобилем. Если у вас нет времени прочесть всю книгу, пожалуйста, прочитайте первую главу, чтобы ознакомиться с вашим автомобилем. В данном руководстве рассматриваются следующие 2WD и 4WD (полноприводные и с приводом на одну ось) модели Honda Orthia с 1996 по 2002: Модель: E-EL1, E-EL2 и E-EL3. Модель двигателя В18В и В20В. Типы автомобиля GX, 2,0GX и 2,0GX-S — 2WD и 4WD. Автомобиль Honda Orthia имеет множество функций, о которых вы сможете прочесть в данном руководстве. Также вы найдете информацию о том, как правильно управлять автоматической коробкой передач, разъяснения о работе систем ABS (антиблокировочная тормозная система) и SRS (дополнительная система устройств пассивной безопасности, система воздушных подушек безопасности) и многое другое! Пожалуйста, обращайтесь к данному руководству, как только вам понадобится дополнительная информация о работе с Honda Orthia. Данное руководство по эксплуатации повысит ваш опыт вождения.
     
    Honda CR-V: 2002-2006. Руководство по эксплуатации, цветные электросхемы Honda CR-V: 2002-2006. Руководство по эксплуатации, цветные электросхемы
    Автор: Черчилл Дж. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Алфамер Паблишинг Год: 2010 Страниц: 424 Дата загрузки: 11 июня 2012

       В руководстве рассмотрены: Автомобили Honda CR-V «MK II». Модификации с бензиновым двигателем i-VTEC объемом 2.0 литра (1998 куб.см.) и с дизельным двигателем i-CDTi объемом 2.2 литра (2204 куб.см.) Не рассматриваются модификации «MK I», выпускавшиеся с 1997 до 2001 года, а также «MK III», выпуск которых начат в 2007 году. Включена инструкция по эксплуатации. Цветные электросхемы. Целью данного Руководства является оказание помощи владельцу в использовании всего потенциала автомобиля. Это может быть достигнуто несколькими способами. Прежде всего, вы сможете понять, какой из узлов автомобиля требует обслуживания или ремонта, а также оценить возможность выполнения этого своими силами. Также в Руководстве приводится полный перечень процедур периодического текущего обслуживания. Приводятся также наиболее распространенные неисправности и способы их обнаружения и устранения. Мы надеемся, что вы сможете самостоятельно решить многие из возникающих проблем. Выполнение некоторых процедур занимает так мало времени, что легче сделать это самому, чем обращаться на станцию обслуживания. Вы сможете сэкономить не только свое время, но и деньги. В Руководстве приведены подробные иллюстрированные описания различных узлов и механизмов автомобиля. Все процедуры обслуживания и ремонта описаны пошагово и проиллюстрированы.
     
    Honda CR-V с 2002 г: выпуска. Устройство, обслуживание, ремонт, эксплуатация Honda CR-V с 2002 г: выпуска. Устройство, обслуживание, ремонт, эксплуатация
    Автор: Рябов П.С. Жанр: Honda Издательство: Арус Год: 2006 Страниц: 428 Дата загрузки: 15 мая 2009

       Руководство по ремонту, устройству, техническому обслуживанию и эксплуатации автомобилей Honda CR-V с 2002 года выпуска, с бензиновыми двигателями рабочим объемом 2.0, 2.4 л., оборудованные 4-ступенчатой АТ или 5-ступенчатой РКПП.
     
    Honda Fit / Jazz: Леворульные и праворульные модели с 2001 г. Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации Honda Fit / Jazz: Леворульные и праворульные модели с 2001 г. Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Монолит Год: 2008 Страниц: 298 Дата загрузки: 26 марта 2011

       Данная книга приводит самые основные сведения об устройстве автомобилей Honda Fit / Jazz и их модификаций, рекомендации по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию, описание возможных неисправностей двигателя, трансмиссии, ходовой части, рулевого управления, тормозной системы. Модели Honda Fit GD: 1,3i R4 8V SOHC 1339 см³, с 2001 г. 1,5i R4 16V SOHC VTEC 1496 см³, с 2003 г. Модели Honda Jazz: 1,2i R4 8V SOHC 1243 см³, с 2002 г. 1,4i R4 8V SOHC 1339 см³, с 2002 г. Указания и рекомендации, приведенные в предлагаемом пособии, помогут провести ТО и сделать ремонт, как на станции технического обслуживания, так и своими силами. В книге Вы найдете пособие по эксплуатации Honda Fit / Jazz, рекомендации по техническому обслуживанию и схемы электрооборудования (электросхемы) автомобиля.
     
    Honda Accord VIII: Выпуск с 2008 года Honda Accord VIII: Выпуск с 2008 года
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Ротор Год: 2010 Страниц: 324 Дата загрузки: 24 августа 2012

       Руководство по ремонту, эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию автомобилей Honda Accord VIII с 2008 года выпуска, модели с левым и правым рулем, с бензиновыми двигателями 2,0 л и 2.4 л. Хонда Акорд – это автомобиль с современной внешностью, в которой смешались японские и европейские мотивы. Его легко узнать по пропорция кузова и по фальшрадиатольной решетке с большой хромированной стилизованной буквой H. Обширное использование самый передовых технологий обеспечивает высочайший уровень безопасности и экологичности, исключительную тщательность изготовления, улучшенные эксплуатационные характеристики, выдающиеся динамические качества, повышенный комфорт и выразительный стиль. Не зря этот автомобиль получил «музыкальное» название. Звучание мотора Хонды можно назвать исполнением автомобильного концерта, а водитель сидя за рулем Аккорда ощущает очень редкое чувство полного слияния с машиной. Но, рано или поздно, приходит время, когда в нашей симфонии начинают звучать фальшивые нотки, появляются сбои в работе двигателя и приходится задуматься: что же мы делаем не так? Почему наш аккорд барахлит? И как мы можем помочь нашему любимцу? Ответить на эти и другие вопросы нам поможет руководство по ремонту, эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию автомобилей Honda Accord VIII с 2008 года выпуска, модели с левым и правым рулем, с бензиновыми двигателями 2,0 л и 2.4 л. Материал в данном справочнике изложен в простой, доступной форме. Каждая глава посвящена отдельному агрегату автомобиля. В начале книги имеется инструкция по техническому обслуживанию, поэтому большинство работ может быть произведено своими силами. А работы, которые необходимо проводить при определенном пробеге, описаны в руководстве по эксплуатации. В первой главе подробно рассмотрен такой агрегат авто, как двигатель. Описаны системы: зарядки аккумулятора, охлаждения, круиз контроля, VTEC/VTC, зажигания, смазки двигателя, снижение токсичности, поглощения паров (EVAP), EGR, впрыска топлива PGM-FI, впускная система PCV (принудительная вентиляция картера). Заканчивается глава описанием электропроводки двигателя. Вторая глава посвящена трансмиссии. В третьей главе описано рулевое управление. В главе четыре освещены передняя и задние подвески. О тормозной системе можно прочитать в главе номер пять. Система HVAC подробно рассмотрена в главе шесть, а в главе семь до малейших подробностей описаны кузов и электрооборудование автомобиля. Разобраться с системой безопасности поможет глава восемь. И в заключительной главе размещены подробные принципиальные электрические схемы. Как видите в этой книге можно найти всю необходимую информацию для правильной эксплуатации и ремонта вашей Honda Accord VIII. Если вы хотите чтобы не было сбоев в работе вашего авто обязательно ознакомьтесь с данным руководством. Эта книга поможет вам в трудную минуту, даже если вы далеко от автосервиса. Книга предназначена для владельцев автомобилей Хонда Аккорд 8, персонала СТО и ремонтных мастерских.
     
    Honda CR-V (правый руль) с 1995 г: выпуска. Руководство по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт Honda CR-V (правый руль) с 1995 г: выпуска. Руководство по эксплуатации, устройство, техническое обслуживание, ремонт
    Жанр: Honda Издательство: Автонавигатор Год: 2011 Страниц: 408 Дата загрузки: 26 марта 2014

       Руководство по ремонту Honda CR-V (правый руль) c 1995 года выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями B20B рабочим объемом 2.0 л.
     

    Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:

    Это тоже интересно:

  • Инструкция honda civic 4d 2008
  • Инструкция home security alarm system инструкция
  • Инструкция hofmann monty 3300 24
  • Инструкция hikvision ds 2de4225w de
  • Инструкция high power на русском языке по эксплуатации

  • Подписаться
    Уведомить о
    guest

    0 комментариев
    Старые
    Новые Популярные
    Межтекстовые Отзывы
    Посмотреть все комментарии